Winlase LAN User Manual

Lanmark Controls Inc. has prepared this document for use by its personnel, licensees, and potential licensees. Lanmark Controls Inc. reserves the right to change any products described in this document as well as information included herein without prior notice. Although the information presented in this document has been tested and reviewed, this document does not convey any license or warrantee beyond the terms and conditions set forth in the written contracts and license agreements between Lanmark Controls Inc. and its customers. The software described in this document is licensed from and is a trade secret of Lanmark Controls Inc. Refer to your License Agreement for restrictions on use, duplication, or disclosure.

Government users and prime contractors are also governed by the following restricted rights legend: RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 © (1) (ii) (Oct. 1988) and FAR 52.227-19 © (June 1987) or other agency provision is as applicable. Copyright Lanmark Controls Inc. WinLase, Lanmark and Lanmarker are registered trademarks of Lanmark Controls Inc. in the United States and other countries. Other brands mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. There is no implied warranty of fitness for a particular purpose, and Lanmark Controls Inc. is not responsible for consequential damages. Individual components and/or software modules manufactured by Lanmark Controls Inc. or others may be covered by their own warranties. Refer to the appropriate manuals for this information. Contents ......

1 Introduction System Elements 1-2 Software Tools 1-4 Technical Support 1-4 About this Manual 1-4 Manufacturer 1-5 Revision History 1-6

2 Getting Started Software Installation 2-1 HASP Key (Dongle) Installation 2-3 Safety Considerations 2-4

3 WinLase LAN Basics Quick Start Guide 3-1 Selecting the Display Language 3-2 User Interface 3-4 Security Settings 3-21

4 Working with the LEC-1 Connectivity Options 4-1 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings 4-13 Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely 4-28 Control Signal Options 4-35 Diagnostic Tools 4-39 Firmware Updates 4-43

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide i 5 Job Editing Setting up the Workspace 5-1 Opening, Closing and Saving Jobs 5-4 Assigning Jobs to an LEC-1 device 5-11 Stand-Alone Job Considerations 5-14 Managing Job Entities 5-16 Managing Profiles 5-28 Managing Fonts 5-38 Using the Motion Manager 5-42 Using the Dimension Tool 5-46 Using the Align Tool 5-53 Using the Grid and Guidelines 5-54 Using the Zoom Tools 5-60 Printing Jobs 5-62

6 Job Entities Working with Job Entities 6-1 Mark Entities 6-5 Automation Objects 6-85 Template Object 6-115

7 Marking Jobs Using PreviewMark 7-1 Using the QuickMark Feature 7-4 Running Jobs 7-6 Running Stand-Alone Jobs 7-24 Controlling WinLase LAN Remotely 7-28

8 The Marking Field and Lens Understanding Field Distortions 8-1 Correcting for Mechanical Alignment Tolerances 8-8

ii WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 11 10 9 Warranty Pro-Dex OMSmotioncontroller Intelligent motioncontrol Motion Configuration Laser Diagnostics Using aVisiblePointer Working withtheLaserDriverWizard Connecting toLasers

9-26

9-23 10-1

10-17

9-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN iii . . . . . iv WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en INTRODUCTION ...... 1 .

Congratulations on selecting the WinLase LAN Software Suite, a powerful collection of laser marking software modules and libraries for OEM laser marking system integrators.

The WinLase LAN Software Suite includes the following: • The WinLase Graphical User Interface, which includes a software command API • Lanmark Controls Inc. COM Automation Server API object interface library • WinLase LAN Host Programming Interface • The TCP/IP Test Client tool • The LEC Remote Admin tool

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 1 -1 INTRODUCTION 1 System Elements

.SYSTEM ...... ELEMENTS ......

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE WinLase LAN offers a rich feature set and industry-leading capabilities by providing the complete software/controller solution from the User Interface to the firmware resident on the LEC-1 card.

System Architecture

WINLASE LAN LASER MARKING SOFTWARE WinLase LAN elements include: • Supports LEC-1 Ethernet controller cards

• Runs on Windows XP Professional and Windows Vista Business

1 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en controller. for controllingWinLase LAN, ability totake controlofWinLase LAN.Inad Programming Interface The Host HOST PROGRAMMINGINTERFACE Automation Server Interface Manual availabl COM Automation server interface, please refer to the document package WinLase COM ability tocommunicateandwith control WinLasedetailed LAN.For information onthe WinLaseserv Automation LANexposesaCOM LIBRARY SERVER AUTOMATION COM can beefficientlyMost procedures se sequencing tool (simplifiedla WinLase LANcontainsthe all of elements ofamulti-elementEditor, Job automation Host Interfacecontrol • Marker Libraryfunctionality • Regional language support for:Chinese(S • withintelligent Interfaces • Extensiveobjects: array Wa ofAutomation • Data Supports 2Dbarcodetypes • SupportsCode linearbarcodetypesCodaBa 39, • Supports graphic fileimportof DXF (versi • Supports TrueType,OpenType Laser fonts and • Easy configuration of • 13, 14, 2000), PLT, EMF, WMF, EX2, MCL, BMP, JPG, GIF, PCX (Spain) (United States), French (France),German (G POSTNET,E, A, UPC UPC (IAutomate andILec) Application, Alignmen MessageBox, XY Motion, Rotary Motion,Li laserparameters forspecificlasers via RS-232 or Ethernet t Tool, Laser Control motioncontrollers for mu dder logic), andpassword-prote and reading statusbackfrom and EAN 8, EAN 13,8, BookLan EAN EAN is exposed inaCOM Automation server interface provides a remote program, wr provides aremoteprogram, Matrix, DensoQRCode, PDF417 rved entirelywithin fromprogram. the dition, theFieldbusinterface provides ameans e separately from Lanmark Controls Inc. Lanmark Controls e separately from ons 13, 14,2004,13, 2000, 2007)DWG(versionsons implified), Chinese(Traditional),English it for Input, Set Output, Time Delay, ermany), Italian, Japa near Motion,SerialCommunication, Run er,which offers the externalprograms r,Interleaved93, Code128, 2 of5, Code ltiple motionaxis control WinLaseMaster LANtothe cted Operator's Interface. WinLaseUser Guide LAN itten by the customer, the INTRODUCTION nese, Korean,Spanish System Elements System

1 -3 . . . . . INTRODUCTION 1 Software Tools

.SOFTWARE ...... TOOLS......

TCP/IP TEST CLIENT WinLase LAN has a built-in server, ready to respond to requests for information from other programs over an Ethernet network. The TCP/IP Test Client is a utility program, which allows simple testing and debugging of the server interface from the same computer or from a remote computer.

LEC REMOTE ADMIN TOOL The LEC Remote Admin Tool is a utility program which allows communication directly with an LEC-1 control card. Please refer to the LEC-1 documentation regarding the use of the Remote API.

.TECHNICAL ...... SUPPORT ...... If you are experiencing problems using WinLase LAN and you need help, you should:

1 Retry the action, carefully following the instructions given for that task in this manual.

2 Check the Troubleshooting section of this manual for troubleshooting information.

3 Try to reproduce the problem and document the exact scenario in which it occurs. If possible, save screen captures of all error/event messages.

4 Try to determine the nature of the problem. By eliminating variables, the problem can be narrowed down. If it appears to be hardware problems, check the documentation that came with your hardware for maintenance or hardware-related issues. Contact your hardware representative if necessary.

.ABOUT ...... THIS...... MANUAL ...... The WinLase LAN User's Manual contains detailed information about the WinLase LAN tools and commands. The manual is intended for use as a reference tool in everyday work with the WinLase LAN software Suite. This manual assumes a working knowledge of computers and their operating conventions, including how to use a mouse and standard menus and commands. To review these techniques, see the documentation that came with the computer system.

1 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en http://www.lanmarkcontrols.com Boxborough, MA01719 USA 1740 MassachusettsAvenue Inc. Lanmark Controls ...... MANUFACTURER WinLaseUser Guide LAN INTRODUCTION Manufacturer

1 -5 . . . . . INTRODUCTION 1 Revision History

.REVISION ...... HISTORY......

Revision Date Changes from previous revision 1.0 11/04/09 Original release 1.1 12/20/09 Corrections throughout 1.2 02/04/10 Added details on Mark on the Fly when using Run Job Remote tool 1.3 04/05/10 Added %i Custom String specifier, typo corrections 1.4 06/18/10 Added %F Custom String specifier 1.5 08/12/10 Added new configuration file feature changes. Added details on manually entered calibration data. Improved section on optimizing object rofiles.

1 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en GETTING STARTED ...... 2 .

Before you begin working with WinLase LAN, take a few moments to review installation tips, how to get help, and safety considerations.

.SOFTWARE ...... INSTALLATION...... This section gives the system requirements and steps needed to install WinLase LAN.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The following hardware is required: • Intel Pentium Computers running Windows XP Professional with Service Pack 3 or higher or Windows 7 Professional.

• DVD and/or CD-ROM drive for software installation. • 128 MB RAM in addition to the memory required by other applications. A total of 512 MB or more is recommended.

• 50 MB of local disk space available

HOW THE OPERATING SYSTEM DICTATES SECURITY SETTINGS • When installing the software, an account with Administrative privileges is required. • In order to make any changes to configurations such as laser calibration, lens calibration, etc., the same account that installed the software must be logged on.

• Users with logon privileges less that Administrative will not be allowed to make configuration changes. When attempting to make changes, the following message box will be displayed:

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 2 -1 GETTING STARTED 2 Software Installation

INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE

To install WinLase LAN 1 Do not plug the Hardlock into a USB port at this time. 2 Power up the computer and log on as an Administrator. The logon account must have administrator rights to install the software.

3 Insert the WinLase LAN Installation CD in the CD-ROM or DVD drive.

4 The installation program will start automatically. 5 Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.

2 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en If starting WinLase LAN fromthe Windows StartupFolder To installHASPthe USB version 6 5 4 3 2 1 • • WARNING Registry. Windows inthe aremade changes These starts. LAN WinLase before isenabled HASPdevice the insure to driver configuration, If starting Startup the from LAN WinLase folder, HASP the to bemade must changes installation procedure. after USBport software the available an into completing HASPdevice the Plug NOTE to the computer's USBport. WinLaseinclud LANrequiresthe ...... HASP KEY(DONGLE)INSTALLATION Close the Registry Editor. Registry the Close ValueIn the data clickOK. and 0(zero) enter field, the Right-click pane. right the HASP, the For the select Browse toHKEY_LOCAL and type Type Editor.the Registry Open XP, Windows using If Start clickthe clickRun. then button, Hardlock, select the the select Hardlock, regedit regedit in the Open box and click OK. If using Windows 7, click the Start 7,clickthe Windows clickOK.Ifusing and box button, Open the in You must have Administratorpriv • featuresofWinLase Some LAN may • Start in the search box then press the Enter key. Enter pressthe then searchbox the in incorrect settings could cause incorrect settingscould Exercise extreme cautionwhenma not installed. value in the right pane right Modify. the select value in and hardlock hasplms _MACHINE\SYSTEM\Curre key in the left the keyin in pane. keywillappear the for settings The ed HASP (dongle). A HASP is a A HASP ed HASP(dongle). key in the leftin the key editor. pane Registry of the Fora Windowsunstable. tobecome iledges tomodify the Registry. king changesinthe Registry, as HASP Key (Dongle) ntControlSet\services not beavailableif aHASPkey is GETTING STARTED WinLaseUser Guide LAN security device attached Installation

2 -3 . . . . . GETTING STARTED 2 Safety Considerations

.SAFETY ...... CONSIDERATIONS...... It is important to observe laser safety while working with any laser product. Anyone who may come into contact with lasers or laser systems while they are operating must be aware of the warnings provided in this chapter and throughout the document. In addition, the system operator must be familiar with all cautions and notes throughout this manual.

NOTE • This safety information is provided as a reference to the user. Please consult your Laser System User documentation for details on the safety requirements appropriate for your particular laser system. DANGER • Never stare into the beam of a laser or laser system, even if wearing protective eye wear. Severe injury may result to personnel from failure to observe this safety precaution.

INTRODUCTION Individuals, who maintain, troubleshoot, or otherwise service a laser system must comply with all applicable regulations associated with laser operation and maintenance to ensure their own safety and that of others. This chapter introduces government safety policies and regulations. Specific information regarding these policies and regulations can be obtained by contacting your plant safety representative and by reading the references cited at the end of this section.

WARNING • Severe injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result from failure to observe the most common safety precautions

The hazards associated with laser operation include both lethal high voltage and those of potential severe eye or skin damage from exposure to the invisible radiation from a direct or reflected infrared laser beam. To minimize these hazards, personnel should exercise caution at all times when operating, maintaining or troubleshooting the system.

SAFETY POLICIES AND REGULATIONS Local/municipal, state/provincial, and federal/national governments legislate safety policies for laser operation. Government policies and regulations for the safe operation of lasers take priority over plant and any general guidelines presented. Refer to your plant safety representative for specific government policies and regulations that apply to safe laser system operation at your site. In the United States of America, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) verifies compliance with Federal standards.

2 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en beams. Skin burnsfrom acut beams. Skinarealsopossible direct contactwi possible from Skin burnsare SKIN BURNS DANGER NOTE direct or indirecte dependi retinal burns(orboth), Cornealor EYE DAMAGE WARNING PATH BEAM OPTICAL ZONESAND HAZARD WARNING LASER HAZARDS laser or laser system. orlaser laser more information, seeSection2.3.4.2BeamTu radiation. Topreventdamage, aClassI skin wear, Eye wear. Safety Laser see the laser with on thelaser or whenworking reason, safety eye wear must always bewornwhen operating the system as aClass IVlaser visible tothenakedeye,itispossible unknow • Never stare into the beam of a laser or laser system, even if wearing if wearing even of beam system, a into or laser laser the stare Never • Failure to use the specified safety eye wear can result in burns to the • beamproduced The by most industrial • All maintenance/service • xposure to alaser beam. Because mo failure toobserve this safety precaution. protective safetyeye wear. Severe eyesight cornea andretina,most likely resu skin damage, and the electrical hazards associated with the equipment. lase zones ofthe aware ofthehazard operatorsthe effects from lase ofthe BEAM ALLOW YOURSELF TO BEEXPOSEDTO A DIRECT LASER energized. wavelength,appropriate mustbeworn Laser safety eye wear, witha minimum optical density (OD) 07forthe Z136.1-1993,Stan AmericanNational SystemSafety, and following theC performed within the safety guidelines discussed in this chapter on . UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCES SHOULDYOU ng upon laser wavelength, are possible from are possible ng uponlaserwavelength, actions on alaseror la cover removed.Fordeta enclosure, laser cover,laser enclosure, (for andbeam tubes e exposure to highlevels th high levels of optic th highlevels bes) should beinpl ingly beexposedtothelaserlight.Forthis injurymayresult topersonnelfrom lting in loss or impairmentof ontrol Measures listedinANSI st industrial lase r emissions, the operator must be operator must r emissions,the r,the potentialfor severe eye or dard for the Safe Use of Lasers. Safe Use dard forthe when a laser or laser system is laser or laser a when lasers is invisi lasers is GETTING STARTED WinLaseUser Guide LAN Safety Considerations ser system must be ace when operating a whenoperating ace al radiationfromlaser ils aboutsafety eye of indirect optical r beams are not ble. To protect

2 -5 . . . . . GETTING STARTED 2 Safety Considerations

DEVICES TO REDUCE LASER HAZARD RISKS To reduce the risks of potential hazards of the laser, the following safety devices should be used as directed.

LASER SAFETY EYE WEAR Laser safety eye wear with a minimum optical density (OD) of 7 for light at the appropriate wavelength must be worn by everyone in the area whenever the laser is operational.

BEAM TUBES Beam tubes (or rubber bellows) placed in the laser or laser system between the mirrors, apertures, and other laser components:

• reduce the eye hazard if the laser or laser system cover were to be removed • limit direct access to the raw laser beam, and • protect optical surfaces from dust and contamination.

FURTHER READING For more information on laser safety issues, consult the following sources: Laser Safety Guide and other safety publications, Laser Institute of America 12424 Research Parkway, Suite 125, Orlando, FL 32826 Tel. 1-800-34LASER or (407) 380-1553. FAX (407) 380-5588

American National Standard for the Safe Use of Lasers, ANSI Z136.1-1993. Order from Laser Institute of America (see above).

Laser Technology and Safety Training Aids, Rock well Laser Industries. Tel. (513) 271-1568.

2 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en WINLASE LAN BASICS ...... 3 .

.QUICK ...... START ...... GUIDE...... Follow these steps to quickly get your WinLase LAN software and your LEC-1 controller card up and running:

• Become familiar with the WinLase LAN user interface. See “User Interface”. • Determine the IP addressing scheme to use. See “Connectivity Options” on page 4 -1. • Connect the cables between the PC and the LEC-1 • Establish a network connection with the LEC-1 device from WinLase LAN. See “Making a Connection” on page 4 -6. • Configure the LEC-1 with the appropriate laser and lens settings. See “Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings” on page 4 -13. • Add a system entity to a job. See “Adding a System Entity” on page 5 -16. • Assign the job to the LEC-1 device. See “Assigning Jobs to an LEC-1 device” on page 5 -11. • Mark a sample in streaming mode by using the QuickMark feature. See “Using the QuickMark Feature” on page 7 -4.

NOTE • Some features of WinLase LAN may not be available if a Hardlock key is not installed.

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 3 -1 WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 Selecting the Display Language

.SELECTING ...... THE . . . . .DISPLAY ...... LANGUAGE ...... WinLase LAN can be configured to use any one of the provided local display languages. Currently, these languages are: Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), English (United States), French (France), German (Germany), Italian, Japanese, Korean, and Spanish (Spain). Most of the Asian languages will not be availble unless the version of Windows supports that language, or has been specially configured. WinLase LAN. After installing WinLase LAN, the default language is English (United States).

To change the Default Language 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on Languages tab. The Languages page appears.

3 Select the desired language that will be used to display text throughout WinLase LAN. 4 Click the Set as Default button. The Restart Application window displays.

5 Click the OK button.

3 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 6 Local language display Close WinLase LAN and then restart changes. then the and apply LAN to WinLase Close Selecting the Display Language WINLASEBASICS LAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN

3 -3 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

.USER ...... INTERFACE ...... There are three interfaces available in which to interact with the software: • The Job Editor Workspace, where all editing and full controls are available to the Job programmer.

• The Operator interface, a limited interface, which only allows loading and running of Jobs. Job editing is not allowed.

• The Touch screen interface, a specialized interface with large buttons and text boxes, designed for use with touch screens. This interface can be used with mouse input as well.

JOB EDITOR WORKSPACE When WinLase LAN is started for the first time, the Job Editor Workspace is displayed by default. The Job Editor Workspace provides all editing functions and the full control set. Every function provided in the Job Editor Workspace can also be password protected by using the Permissions feature. See “Security Settings”. In the Job Editor Workspace, the window within the WinLase LAN program represents the physical marking field which is referred to as the Page size, which can be customized in the Job settings. See “Customizing the Page Size” on page 5 -2.

To switch to the Job Editor Workspace 1 From the Main menu, select System > Security > User Access. The Access Levels window appears.

3 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 2 H G F E D C B A J I H G F E D C B A WorkspaceThe JobEditor Click the All editing functions radio button. button. radio functions editing Click theAll Motion Manager Profile Manager Bar Status Object Manager Area Work Rulers Viewer System Laser Toolbars Main Menu Title Bar WINLASEBASICS LAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN User Interface J I

3 -5 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

SETTING THE UNITS OF MEASURE All marking objects placed in the marking field have their dimensions and positions specified internally in bits. See “Coordinate System Conventions” on page 5 -1. To display an object’s position and size in real world dimensions such as millimeters, WinLase LAN needs to use a scale factor to convert from bits into millimeters. This scale factor is provided by the Lens Correction file. Different Lens Correction files have different scale factors. As a result, the physical size and position of an object in real world dimensions will change when the Lens Correction file is changed, although their position and size in bits will not.

To change the Units of Measure 1 From the Main menu, select View. The View menu appears.

2 The current units are indicated with a dot to the left of the units. Select the desired units.

3 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en accuracy display Units the change To 2 1 E D C B A A The Workspace settingspage Click the WorkspaceClick the tab.WorkspaceThe page appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From B E D C Select the units used th units used Select the Select the number ofdecimalpl Select the Select the offsetappliedtoan object Select the number ofdecimalpla Select the Select the number ofdecimalpla Select the roughoutinterface the aces used when displaying inches when displaying aces used ces used when displaying degreeswhen displaying ces used ces used when displaying millimeters when displaying ces used when thekeyboard nudgefeatureused is WINLASEBASICS LAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN User Interface

3 -7 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

THE TOP TOOLBAR The Top Toolbar consists of shortcuts to often used functions, menus, and other tools used to edit a Job. Place the cursor on a tool in the Toolbar to display the function of that tool in a hint window. The Top Toolbar location is below the Main menu.

Button Function

Add a new job to the workspace

Open a job file

Save the current job

Save the current job with a new name

Print the current job

Cut the current selection to the Clipboard

Copy the current selection to the Clipboard

Paste the current selection from the Clipboard

Delete the current selection

Undo the last action

Import a file

Export a graphic image to a PLT or WLO file

Minimize laser power

Control Guide laser

Open QuickMark window

Open Run Process window

3 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en hint window. The Left Toolbar location is Button functions. Place the cursoron a The LeftToolbara to shortcuts consistsof TOOLBAR LEFT THE Button Show full workspaceShow full Zoomtool out intool Zoom pointer Arrow Function New Polygon New Rectangle Rounded New Rectangle New Line New Change user access level user Change text selected paragraph the Right justify text paragraph selected the Center justify paragraphtext Left justifytheselected text totheselected Apply Italicsattribute Apply Boldattribute Open Globalstoolbox Function tool in the Toolbar to display to the selected text to the down the left side of the screen. the leftsideof down dd objects to the job andoften used drawing WINLASEBASICS LAN the function of thattool in a WinLaseUser Guide LAN User Interface

3 -9 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

Button Function

New Text

New Barcode

New Automation

New Point array

Show Guidelines

Snap to Guidelines

Show Grid

Snap to Grid

Open Alignment tool

Open Dimension tool

3 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en menuthe Tools program to To adda To display orhide the Rulers 1 • A by selecting the Display by selectingthe E D C B A The Configure Tools window programs. external start that WinLase LAN provides the ability to custo CUSTOMIZING THE TOOLS MENU ITEM area. work the around ordisappear View rulersappear Select The >Rulers. theare rulers displayed. physical size of the marking area. Changethe ru a top display onthe The Rulers DISPLAYING THERULERS appears. Tools select menu, Main the From Tools. > Configure Tools Configure The window Moves theprograms up ordown in Opensthe Edit toolwindow. aprogramRemoves from list. the Opens the Add tool window to Displays thelist of availa Units ofMeasure.See ble configured programs. add a new program anew add tothelist. nd left sidesof the work area the Toolslist withtheArrow buttons. mize a special Tools menu by adding menuitems

E D C B “Setting the Units of Units Measure” the “Setting ler settingsto WINLASEBASICS LAN , andvisuallyindicate the Millimeters, In WinLase UserGuide LAN User Interface ches, or Bits . Bydefault,

3 -11 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

• Click the Add button. The Edit Tool window appears.

A B D

The Edit Tool window A The name of the program as displayed in the Tools menu. B The path to the executable file that will run when the tool item is selected in the Tools menu. C Optional command line switch parameters. Consult the documentation for the program to be run to see if there are any parameters required. D Opens the Browse dialog to locate the executable file to run.

TIP • The ellipsis (…) is usually added to the end of a menu item to indicate to the user that further action is required after the menu item is selected

To edit an existing Tool 1 From the main menu, select Tools > Configure Tools. The Configure Tools window appears. 2 In the Tools list, select the tool to edit and click the Edit button. The Edit Tool window appears.

To delete a Tool 1 From the main menu, select Tools > Configure Tools. The Configure Tools window appears.

2 In the Tools list, select the tool to delete and click the Delete button. The tool is removed from the list.

3 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To display orhide the Laser System Viewer 2 1 C B A configuration, or assigne that network. Openjobsare C B A The LaserSystemViewer The Laser System Viewer showsthe local area VIEWER SYSTEM LASER The open Jobscontrol, tab Job showing isJob1.wlj. theActive Active Job. The open Job Tabs control provides avisual indi THE OPENJOBSTAB also close the Laser System Viewer. System Laser closethe also ri upper inthe button theClose on Clicking area. leftwork the the of side Viewer.System View Laser Select > at Viewer disappears System or appears Laser The D Jobs assigned to assigned Jobs device LEC-1 A detected The LocalArea connection Network Close button Close device an LEC-1 d toanLEC-1device. displayed inthe Viewer aseither assigned tothe Offline ght corner of the Laser System Viewer System Laser the will of corner ght D network, andanyLEC- cationofthe currentlyloaded Jobs andthe WINLASEBASICS LAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN 1 devicesdetectedon User Interface

3 -13 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

OBJECT MANAGER The Object Manager displays the Job Entities that are contained in the current job. The objects are listed in the order in which they will mark/process. If more than one object appears in the Object list, the up and down blue arrows (at the bottom of the Object Panel) become enabled. Use these buttons to move objects up and down relative to each other in the list. The number of objects within a Job is displayed to the right of the Objects title. A particular object can be selected by entering the object Index in the Index box. Use the Mark object and Mark fill check boxes to toggle the outline marking and fill marking features. Objects can also be selected and grouped from the Object list. See “Managing Job Entities” on page 5 -16 for more details.

A F

C G

D E

The Object Manager A Object title with number of objects in parentheses B Objects contained in the job (three shown) C Index of the selected object within the job D Select this option to enable marking the outline of the object E Select this option to mark fill (only available if fill has been enabled. See “Fill (Hatching)” on page 6 -7) F Close button G Up / down arrows used to move an object within the list

3 -14 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To display the Profile Manager To display orhide the Object Manager 2 1 1 E D C B A A The ProfilesPanel on page Profiles can beviewed and edited by the Profilea right clicking on Profiles can beaddedtoobjec Profiles can beorganized into groups of folder hierarchicalThe Profilea view Manager displays PROFILES PANEL close the Object Manager. Object the close willalso ObjectManager the of corner right upper inthe button theClose on Clicking workarea. ofthe side ViewManager.Select left the >Object at disappears or appears Manager Object The side of the Work ofthe side area. ViewSelect Manager. >Profile right the at disappears or appears Manager Profile The E D C B F Click toaddaprofile The Default profile,The Default whichisappliedtoa Individual profiles inafolder contained A profile folder organizeto Click theprofiles inthelibrary Default Profile”5 on page -28 Close button Close

-9 for more information. to the Profile the to library nd selecting the desired item desired nd selectingthe ts or groupsor ofobjectsfrom ts .

double clicking on the sp double clickingon ll newobjectswhentheyare firstcreated.See F s, andapplied to marki of the Profiles the user has saved. These These saved. has user the Profiles of the WINLASEBASICS LAN from the popup context menu. popup context fromthe within the ProfileManagerby ecific Profile. See WinLaseUser Guide LAN ng objectsinthe Job. User Interface

“The “Profiles”

3 -15 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

2 Clicking on the Close button in the upper right corner of the Profile Manager will also close the Profile Manager.

MOTION MANAGER The Motion Manager provides a tool for direct control of installed motion devices. See “Using the Motion Manager” on page 5 -42 for more information.

E B

The Motion Manager (may look different based on installed hardware) A Motion Configuration B Control panel C Control buttons D Close button E Settings button

To display or hide the Motion Manager 1 Select View > Motor Manager. The Motion Manager appears or disappears at the right side of the work area.

2 Clicking on the Close button in the upper right corner of the Motion Manager will also close the Motion Manager.

3 -16 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To switch to the Job EditorWorkspace mode Interface Operator to switch To 3 2 1 2 1 B A B A The OperatorInterface from making anychanges totheOperat Job. The in use is intendedfor The OperatorInterface INTERFACE OPERATOR Click the OK button. The screen switches to Operator Interface mode. Interface to Operator switches screen The OKbutton. Click the button. radio only interface Operator Click the appears. window Levels Access Access. The >User > Security selectSystem menu, main the From Select the All editing functions radio button, then click OK. click then button, radio functions editing the All Select appears. window Levels Access Access. The >User > Security select System menu, main the From User Accesssettings, theOperatorInterface becomes available. execute pre-savedJobs,andtocl to necessary Limited Toolbar Limited Mainmenu applications where the applications where ose the application. When configured inthe When ose theapplication. or Interfaceprovides WINLASEBASICS LAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN operator isrestricted the minimum controls controls minimum the User Interface

3 -17 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE The Touch Screen Interface is intended for use in applications where the operator is restricted from making any changes to the Job. The Touch Screen Interface provides the minimum controls necessary to execute pre-saved Jobs, and close the application. The design of the Touch Screen Interface facilitates using a Touch Screen display panel, although a mouse driven interface is also possible. When configured in the User Access settings, the Touch Screen Interface becomes available.

NOTE • This feature is available only if a Hardlock key is installed.

To switch to Touch Screen Interface mode 1 From the Main menu, select System > Security > User Access. The Access Levels window appears. 2 Click the Touch screen interface radio button.

3 Click the OK button. The screen switches to the Touch Screen mode

B D

G H

The Touchscreen Interface A Loads a Job from the Touchscreen Job folder location. See “To edit the Default Open and Save behavior” on page 5 -10. Jobs are loaded by clicking on the drop down list and selecting an available Job.

3 -18 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en H G F B E D C Display an on-screenDisplay keyboard interface. the fullediting Click this button to see a secondary menu, which has menu, a secondary Click thisbuttontosee Shut down Windows directly withthisbutton. page 4 -36 Starts execution of theloaded Job. customized strings to repres Displays thestatus of Interlocks Job running the of execution stops Immediately Displays theobjectswithin the Jo theGo andthenclicking menu, main . ent each interlockport.See ent each 1through Theseinterlockpanel 4. b in relation tothemark field. Clicking this button is equivalent is this button Clicking button in the Run Process intheRun button dialog. selections for Global se Global for selections “To configure the Interlocks” on WINLASEBASICS LAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN s can becustomizeds todisplay toselecting J ttings, andtoreturn to User Interface ob > Run fromob > the

3 -19 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 User Interface

To switch to the Job Editor Workspace 1 Click the OPTIONS button. The OPTIONS window appears.

2 Click the FULL ACCESS button. The full access interface is restored. If a password is set, the system will prompt for the password.

3 Enter the password and click OK.

4 The full access interface is restored.

3 -20 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en through aninitializationfile. each Permission Level can beassigned a uni Every individual functionwithin WinLase L password No required • •User Technician • Administrator • WinLase LANoffers four WORKING WITHPERMISSIONS User interface accesslevels • Passwords • Login levels • Permissions • working with: Professionalhas fullyintegratedpassword pr To control access touser interfaceelemen ...... SETTINGS SECURITY levels of permissions: ts as well as Job ed AN can be assigned a que password. These assignments are done que password.Theseassignments otection available.System Security involves WINLASEBASICS LAN iting functions, WinLaseiting functions, WinLaseUser Guide LAN Permission Leveland Security Settings

3 -21 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 Security Settings

WORKING WITH THE PERMISSIONS FILE WinLase LAN uses an external file to configure the Permission levels for all protected tasks. This file can be found in the \marker\bin folder. The file is named permissions.ini. The following is a partial representation of the file loaded into notepad for editing.

The permissions.ini file Each line in the file represents a specific task description followed by the Permission Level to assign this task.

The Permission Levels are defined as follows: • 0 = No password required • 1 = User password required • 2 = Technician password required • 3 = Administrator password required For example, in the first line from the example above, SYSTEM_PREFERENCES=2, in order to make System Preference changes, the user has to know the Technician password to complete the task.

3 -22 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en currenttheTo change LoginLevel To change Permission Levels 1 3 2 1 2 • • • • the higher Permission Level, permission is granted without prompting for a password. for prompting without granted is Level,permission Permission higher the password isno Ifthere isdisplayed. setfor Level Permission higher forthe challenge If the task Level,a thecurrent passwordLogin Levelthan Permission a requires higher apassword. for prompting without granted is permission Level, Login current the to or equal islessthan Level Permission If the file. particular that for Level task Permission initialization the The from isdetermined performed task, is userattempts aprotected check the execute When to apermission WinLase LANsupportstheconcept THE LOGINLEVEL USING appears. Levelmenu Login bar, The menu Level. the From >Login > Security selectSystem Required. Password No use and Levels Permission ALL willignore Professional WinLase format, correct inthe fileisnot the after If Level sign. Permission (=) equals the ONLYWARNING: file. tothe lines or add delete not Do tothe achange make above. defined Levels Permission the using after (=)sign permission assigned equals the the Change asnotepad. such editor atext in file permissions.ini the open and Locate The current Login Level ischecked. Level Login current The prompting for apassword. current LoginLevel or below totheset current permission level withinWinLase anyso that tasks LAN, that require the Permissions are granted us will be grantedtask without permissiontoexecutebe the will of a current Login Level.Th ingthe following rules: WINLASEBASICS LAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN e Login Levelallowsauser Security Settings

3 -23 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 Security Settings

3 Select the new Login. If necessary, the password challenge window appears.

4 Enter the correct password and click OK. The current Login Level has been changed.

CHANGING AND DELETING PASSWORDS There are three unique passwords that correspond to the three Permission Levels within WinLase LAN.

To change a password 1 From the menu bar, select System > Security > Change Password. The Change Password menu appears. 2 Select the desired Permission Level password to set. The Change Password window appears.

3 From the New password field, type in the new password.

4 From the Confirm password field, type in the same password as typed for the new password.

5 Click OK. The Change Password window closes, and a password for the selected Permission Level is now enabled.

3 -24 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To assignaccess user passwordTo deletea 1 4 3 2 1 3 2 • • • current session, WinLase LAN supports the c To control access touser interfaceelemen ACCESS USER ASSIGNING window displays the access levels available. access the displays window bar, menu Levels the Access From Access. The >User > Security selectSystem Level. Permission selected for the password password isdisabled Click OK.The and protection isdeleted, is blank. it that so password Newpassword box the the edit delete From the from field, appears. window Password password Change The Level delete. Permission to the desired Select appears. Password menu bar, Change menu The the Password. From >Change > Security selectSystem Click OK to close the window. the close Click OKto available. functions allediting user has the By default, level. access user desired the Enable The following Access modes are available: modes are The followingAccess matter job, no of a allow editing modes override specificpermi close the application. close the screen,used althoughamousecan be Touch screen Operator interface only Full access where all operations are available to the User. the to available are operations all where is alarge button format sc is for Users that are only allowed to load Jobs, run Jobs,and Jobs, allowed toload only Users thatare for is ssion levels on tasks. For exam ssion levelsontasks. what the permission levels ar levels permission what the withthisinterface as well. ts as well as Job editing functions duringthe well asJob as ts reen is displayed andis oncept of Accessmodes. WINLASEBASICS LAN ple, operator mode does not e for those job editing tasks. job e forthose WinLaseUser Guide LAN ideal for use with a touch Security Settings Note thatAccess

3 -25 . . . . . WINLASE LAN BASICS 3 Security Settings

CONTROLLING ACCESS LEVEL AT STARTUP Using the Startup Options menu item, you can control what Access Level WinLase LAN will initialize in. This Access Level is not dependent on the current access level when WinLase LAN is closed. The following Startup Access modes are available:

• Full access where all operations are available to the User • Operator interface only is for Users that are only allowed to load Jobs, run Jobs, and close the application

• Touch screen is a large button format screen is displayed and is ideal for use with a touch screen, although a mouse can be used with this interface as well

To control the Startup Access mode 1 From the menu bar, select System > Security > Startup Options. The Startup Options window displays the available options.

2 Select the desired startup access level. 3 Click OK to close the window. The next time WinLase LAN starts, it will use the selected access mode.

3 -26 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 ...... 4 .

The LEC-1, in conjunction with WinLase LAN, controls a laser system's galvanometer motors, accurately positioning deflection mirrors affixed to these motors in synchronization with laser control signals. The motion sequence, the operation speed/s, the laser power used, and any synchronization with external ancillary equipment is determined by marking jobs created and formatted by WinLase LAN. This chapter covers the basics of using an LEC-1 controller card, and includes:

• Connectivity options, which configure the WinLase LAN software and an LEC-1 controller card so they may communicate with each other

• A section on Laser, Lens and Motion settings, which are configuration files that contain the necessary information for the LEC-1 to interface with lasers, scan heads and motion systems

• A section on configuring the LEC-1 for Stand-Alone Mode operation, where jobs created and edited in WinLase LAN are saved on the LEC-1. At run-time these jobs can be executed directly on the LEC-1 without using WinLase LAN.

.CONNECTIVITY ...... OPTIONS ...... In order for WinLase LAN to correctly detect and connect to available LEC-1 devices, WinLase LAN, the local PC, and the LEC-1 device must be configured correctly. Also, a valid hardlock license key must be installed on the local PC. If no hardlock key is detected, the Laser System Viewer will be disabled, as shown in the following screenshot.

Detection disabled - no Hardlock key detected

The LEC-1 is designed to constantly broadcast its Device name and MAC address on the connected network. That network could be a Local Area Network, or a PC directly connected to the LEC-1 controller card. When WinLase LAN detects a broadcast from an

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 4 -1 WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Connectivity Options

LEC-1 ontroller card, it displays the available LEC-1, as an icon with Device name (MAC address), in the Laser System Viewer.

An available LEC-1 device

Things to consider when configuring for communication: • Assigning a unique Device name to each LEC-1 on a local area network to make it easier to identify LEC-1 device in the Laser System Viewer.

• The IP Addressing scheme, which determines whether the connected resources will have fixed IP addresses, or be assigned an IP address dynamically (DHCP). • Connecting the PC to the LEC-1 with a Direct connection. • Connecting the PC and the LEC-1 to a Local Area Network. • Selecting the default Network Adapter in WinLase LAN.

DEVICE NAME The device name is displayed throughout WinLase LAN to represent an LEC-1 controller card on the network. The MAC address of the device is appended to the device name to create a unique indentifier (two devices could have the same device name).

To change the Device name • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device. Renaming an LEC-1 will require the LEC-1 to be restarted. 1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 controller card and select Settings.

4 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 4 3 2 • The Restart dialog is displayed. ClickYes RestartThe isdisplayed. dialog continue. to OK. click and name device desired the enter field, Name In the tab. Network Click the The new device name appears in the Laser System Viewer. LaserSystem the in appears name newdevice The WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN Connectivity Options

4 -3 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Connectivity Options

IP ADDRESSING SCHEMES The LEC-1 controller card has the option of configuring a static IP address, or contacting a DHCP server to get an IP address when the LEC-1 controller card powers up.

•In Fixed IP Address Mode, care must be taken to use unique IP addresses. This is usually not an issue when directly connecting the PC to an LEC-1, but when connecting to a LAN, there may be many devices on the same network, and all must have a unique IP address.

• Dynamic (DHCP) IP Address Mode is the most common approach, and insures no two resources on the network have the same IP address. This mode will create a lengthy power up sequence however, if the PC and the LEC-1 controller card are directly connected.

To make changes to the LEC-1 IP address settings

WARNING • Select the IP address carefully, as an incorrect address may render the LEC-1 unavailable without changing the PC IP settings.

1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 device and select Settings.

2 Click the Network Tab.

A B

The IP address settings page

4 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en NIC can be used, however, todetecta WinLase LANsupports multiplenetworkcards THE NETWORK DEFAULT SELECTING ADAPTER Addressing... Staticfor IP configured When DHCP...for configured When When usingaLocalArea Network, boththe NETWORK AREA LOCAL THROUGHA CONNECTING Addressing... Staticfor IP configured When DHCP...for configured When connection dependson the input Ethernet PC withthe connector onthe The direct connectionis CONFIGURING A CONNECTION DIRECT A B AddressType: Assigned by DHCP- TheLEC-1 can beconfigured torequest an IP address from • AddressType: Manual -TheLEC-1 canbe configuredfixed (static)awith IP address • Select the IPAddress Mode The IP address tousewh a DHCP server.a DHCP • The LEC-1 The will immediately beav • Both the PC and the LEC-1 will wait for an IP address from a local • LEC-1 The will immediately beav • Sincethere no DHCPserver is availa • Private Network address in the range 169.254.xxx.xxx Privateaddress inthe Network not assigned, bothdevi DHCP server.th exists on If noserver 169.254.xxx.xxx themselves anAutomatic Private Networkaddressrange inthe the PC and the LEC-1 will wait Network LAN, providedthereare noIPaddr LAN the mostsimple-aCAT5cable en inManual(Static) mode IP addressingscheme. nd connectwithLEC-1 controllers cards. ces will assign themselves an Automatic on the LEC-1. The behavior of a direct a behavior of LEC-1. The onthe PC and the LEC-1 isconnectedtothe LAN. (NICs) installed in the local PC. PC. Only one inthe local (NICs) installed WORKING WITH THELEC-1 up to90seconds,assign then ailable for connection toWinLase ailable for connection toWinLase essconflicts Local on the Area ble toassignan IP address, both is usedtoconnect the Ethernet e network, or an IP address is or anIP e network, WinLaseUser Guide LAN Connectivity Options

4 -5 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Connectivity Options

To select the Default Network Adapter 1 From the Main menu, select Connections > Manage... 2 Click the Network adapters tab.

3 Select the appropriate network adapter from the list and click Set as Default.

MAKING A CONNECTION Before WinLase LAN can interact with the LEC-1, a connection must be made to the device. Once one instance of WinLase LAN is connected to an LEC-1, other instances of WinLase LAN are prevented from connecting. In order for a connection to be made, both the PC and the LEC-1 device should be on the same subnet. If WinLase LAN detects that the PC and the LEC-1 device are on incompatible subnets, WinLase LAN has the ability to add a temporary IP addrees to the local PC to allow connection to the LEC-1 device. This feature can be configured to happen automatically. Once the PC is rebooted, this temporary IP address is deleted.

4 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To connect to an LEC-1 controller To automatically add an IPaddress tothe 1 3 2 1 CONNECTING MANUALLY CONNECTING “Connect”. Viewer, System click Laser and In the card controller LEC-1 anavailable on right-click adapter. PCnetwork compatible default to the a add IPaddress automatically to option mismatch” onsubnet automatically IP address temporary a new “Add Select the tab adapters Network Click the >Manage... Connections select menu, Main the From

. PC when incompatible subnets are detected WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN Connectivity Options

4 -7 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Connectivity Options

2 If the PC and the LEC-1 are on different subnets, and the feature to automatically add a new IP address is disabled (see “To automatically add an IP address to the PC when incompatible subnets are detected”), the following message will appear:

3 If this dialog appears, click Yes to continue.

4 If there are no Automatic connections configured, the following dialog appears:

5 If you want WinLase LAN to automatically connect to the LEC-1 when it becomes available (see “Connecting automatically”), click Yes, otherwise click No. 6 When WinLase LAN connects to an LEC-1, configuration files are downloaded from the LEC-1 to the local PC. The Pending Connections Viewer shows the progress of this process.

4 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 7 indicate it is actively connected. it isactively indicate to blue cardturns controller LEC-1 the iscomplete, process connection the When WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN Connectivity Options

4 -9 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Connectivity Options

CONNECTING AUTOMATICALLY In single device installations, where there is only one LEC-1 based system available, it may be more convenient to configure WinLase LAN to connect automatically to the LEC-1 controller card.

To configure Automatic Connections 1 From the Main menu, select Connections > Manage...

2 Click the Laser Systems tab.

3 Select the device to automatically connect to from the Laser System name list and click the Add >>> button. 4 To remove an automatic connection, select it in the Automatic connections list and click the Remove button.

5 Select Yes to continue.

CLOSING AN ACTIVE CONNECTION

To close an active connection • In the Laser System Viewer, right-click on the LEC-1 controller card that is currently connected and then click Disconnect.

4 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Icon LEC-1 controllercard. WinLasedifferent LANuses icons ICONS STATUS THELEC-1 UNDERSTANDING InLocal I/O mode Caching jobs Paused Connecting disconnecting or Busy Not available or not found is PC software incompatible Connected to another client or in local mode Invalid Firmwareor License Available tothis Connected instance of WinLase LAN Status inthe LaserSystem viewer toindicatethe status ofan WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLase UserGuide LAN Connectivity Options

4 -11 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Connectivity Options

CHECKING THE CONNECTION STATUS The status of an LEC-1 can be checked at any time by hovering the mouse over the LEC-1 and waiting for a hint to appear.

To check the LEC-1 status • In the Laser System viewer, place the mouse (hover) over an LEC-1

4 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en WARNING situ For these or desirable. There aretimes,however, whenan the connect toanyLEC-1 andhave alltheinforma files that were downloadedtothe local PC.Th the LEC-1 device(SeeAssigningaJobtoanLE local PC for use by WinLase LAN.See When aconnectionismadeto editing process,information is the Job During ca The LEC-1controllerboard MOTION SETTINGS LENS AND WINLASE LAN USESLASER, UNDERSTANDING HOW The • The • WinLase LANsupports two ...... SETTINGS CHOOSING LASER, hardware manager. WinLase LAN. to calculateanddisplay propertie appropria the selects user when the memory configuration files inthe LEC- so hardware settings andparametersspecific to and motionsettingsfrom the curre information toWinLase LAN when there is Active configuration mode Active configuration mode Offline configuration mode • When editingjobs When in • unexpected behavi lens and motion profiles are the sa ation, WinLaseLAN hasan hardware configurations: . the LEC-1,theseconfigurati n function as a stand-alone ca functionn asa 1 flashmemory.files ar These s such as speeds, distances a , inwhichWinLaseapplie LAN activeconnectiontoanLEC- , which provides the necess provides the , which or will result. ntly active LE

“Making aConnection” LENS ANDMOTION LENS Offline configuration te configuration file Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion needed config from these needed is allows any instance of WinLase LAN to to ofWinLaseLAN instance any allows is tion itneedsfor jobediting.Thisisknown as no connection toan no laser,and motion controlarestoredin lens C-1 device), the Jobuses configuration WORKING WITH THELEC-1 C-1 controller. me as on the target LEC-1, or Offline configurationmode on filesare downloaded ontothe pable embeddedcontroller, and e copied to the LEC-1 flash e copiedtothe nd other related parameters in

mode ary laser,motion and lens WinLaseUser Guide LAN . When a Job is assigned to Job isassigned a . When s in the WinLase LAN 1 controllerisnotpossible, s the current laser, current s the lens LEC-1controller. , make sure the laser, uration files inorder .

4 -13 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings

To select an Offline Laser Driver file 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. 2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Open the Offline folder and select the Laser item under the Offline folder. The laser properties will update the properties panel.

4 Click the Change button. The Select Laser Driver window appears.

5 Select the desired Laser Configuration file from the list and click OK.

4 -14 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en the LEC-1 thePC to from a Laser To copy Driver file 3 2 1 • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device LEC-1 an to connection anactive be must There this LEC-1. The laser properties will appear in the properties panel. intheproperties willappear laserproperties LEC-1. The this treeview. in the under to lasername the the laser Click on assign to LEC-1 the Locate tab. Hardware the Click on Hardwarepage The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN

4 -15 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings

4 Click the Change button. The Select Laser Driver window appears.

5 From the drop down box, select Show Laser drivers in the PC library.

6 Select the desired Laser Driver file from the list. The currently active driver has (active) appended to the driver name.

7 To automatically set the laser driver used in the Offline Configuration to the new selection, check Also apply to Offline configuration.

4 -16 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To select a Laser Driver file already installed onthe LEC-1 4 3 2 1 • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device LEC-1 an to connection anactive be must There Click the Change button. The Select Laser Driver window appears. Driverwindow SelectLaser The button. Change Click the panel. properties inthe appear will laserproperties The LEC-1. view. this tree under inthe name change laser to the Clickon LEC-1 the Locate tab. Hardware the Click on Hardwarepage The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN

4 -17 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings

5 From the drop down box, select Show Laser Drivers installed on the Laser System.

6 Select the desired Laser Configuration file from the list and click OK.

To add a new Laser Driver file to WinLase LAN • See “To add a new Laser Driver file” on page 9 -1.

To select an Offline Lens Correction file 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Open the Offline folder and select the Lens item under the Offline folder. The lens properties appear in the properties panel.

4 -18 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To copy a Lens Correction file from the PC tothe LEC-1 2 1 5 4 • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device LEC-1 an to connection anactive be must There Click on the Hardware tab. Hardware the Click on Hardwarepage The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From file correction the new Select appears. window File SelectCorrection The button. Change Click the . Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN

4 -19 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings

3 Locate the LEC-1 to copy the lens to in the tree view. Click on the lens name under this LEC-1. The lens properties appear in the properties panel.

4 Click the Change button. The Select Correction File window appears.

5 From the drop down box, select Show Correction Files in the PC library.

6 Select the new correction file. 7 To automatically set the correction file used in the Offline Configuration to the new selection, check Also apply to Offline configuration.

4 -20 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To selectfileCorrectiona Lens already installedon theLEC-1 4 3 2 1 • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device LEC-1 an to connection anactive be must There Click the Change button. The Select Correction File window appears. window File SelectCorrection The button. Change Click the panel. properties inthe appear properties lens The LEC-1. this under treeview.name the in lens the LEC-1 the on Locate Click tab. Hardware the Click on Hardwarepage The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN

4 -21 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings

5 From the drop down box, select Show Correction Files installed on the Laser System.

6 Select the new correction file.

7 To automatically set the correction file used in the Offline Configuration to the new selection, check Also apply to Offline configuration.

To add a new Lens Correction file to WinLase LAN • See “To create a new Lens Correction file using scan head design data” on page 8 -4.

To select an Offline Motion Configuration file 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Open the Offline folder and select the Motion item under the Offline folder. The motion properties appear in the properties panel.

4 -22 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 5 4 Select the new motion configuration from the list and click OK. click list and the from configuration motion the new Select appears. window Configuration SelectMotion The button. Change Click the Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN

4 -23 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings

To copy a Motion Configuration file from the PC to the LEC-1 • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Locate the LEC-1 to copy the motion configuration to in the tree view. Click on the motion configuration under this LEC-1. The motion properties appear in the properties panel.

4 -24 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 7 6 5 4 selection, check selection, new tothe To Configuration Offline the in fileused configuration setthe automatically file. configuration the new Select From the drop down box, select appears. window Configuration SelectMotion The button. Change Click the Also apply to Offline to Also apply configuration. Show Motion Configurations in the PC library.the PC in Configurations Motion Show Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN

4 -25 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Choosing Laser, Lens and Motion Settings

To select a Motion Configuration file already installed on the LEC-1 • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Locate the LEC-1 in the tree view. Click on the motion configuration under this LEC-1. The motion properties appear in the properties panel.

4 Click the Change button. The Select Motion Configuration window appears.

4 -26 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To create a new Motion Configuration 6 5 • See Select the new configuration file and clickOK and file configuration the new Select System. From the drop down box, select

“To page on Configuration” Motion createanew Show Motion Configurations installed on the Laser the on installed Configurations Motion Show Choosing Laser,Settings Lens andMotion . WORKING WITH THELEC-1

-4 . WinLaseUser Guide LAN

4 -27 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely

.CONTROLLING ...... THE...... LEC-1 ...... REMOTELY...... The LEC-1 supports the ability to execute jobs without the need for a PC. This capability is referred to as Stand-Alone mode. For performance reasons, some features, such as Mark on the Fly, are only available in Stand-Alone mode. To configure Jobs and the LEC-1 for Stand-Alone operation, consider the following:

• Some mark object properties, and some job automation properties need to be correctly configured for use in Stand-Alone mode. See “Stand-Alone Job Considerations” on page 5 -14 for more information. • An LEC Binary job file must be saved in the LEC-1 flash, or on a connect USB flash drive. See “Saving Jobs” on page 5 -5. • If an LEC Binary Job file references an embedded Laser Font, that font must be in the Fonts folder of the LEC-1 device. See “Adding a new Laser font to WinLase LAN” on page 5 -40 and “Managing Job Entities” on page 5 -16 for more information. WinLase LAN provides the following features to configure the LEC-1 for Stand-Alone mode operation:

• A file Browser, which explores the on-board flash and connected USB flash drives • Settings for I/O Job Selection, which provides a means to load selected jobs and execute them with simple discrete I/O

• Settings for Mark on the Fly, which provides for marking on moving parts. •An Interactive tool, which allows communication with an LEC-1 using the Remote API from within WinLase LAN. See “To use the Interactive tool”. •A Run Job Remotely tool, which allows “remote control” of an LEC-1 running a Stand- Alone job from within WinLase LAN. See “Running Stand-Alone Jobs” on page 7 -24.

RUNNING STAND-ALONE JOBS WITH WINLASE LAN WinLase LAN provides the capability to interact with the LEC-1 and run Stand-Alone jobs from within the WinLase LAN user interface. See “Running Stand-Alone Jobs” on page 7 -24.

MANAGING FILES ON THE LEC-1 WinLase LAN provides tools for browsing files that are stored on an LEC-1 or on a connected USB drive. These files can be of type:

• Lec Binary Job files, which have been saved to the LEC-1, and are used when the LEC-1 is executing in Stand-Alone mode

• Laser Font files, which are used by mark objects in Stand-Alone mode

4 -28 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en LEC-1file browser To openthe 2 1 • D C B A D C B A Explorerdevice The LEC-1 device LEC-1 an to connection anactive be must There From the Look in drop down, select Internal Flash memory or External USB stick. USB orExternal memory Flash Internal select down, drop in Look the From Explore... viewer, select System and Laser device In the LEC-1 connected on a right-click F E H G When copying jobs or fonts totheLEC-1, select foundinthecurrentFiles location The amountstorage ofavailableon thecurrent location storedfont library Fonts- The oninternalflashmemory • Storagestick - USB External ava • Internal flash - memory The integrated • toexploreon theLEC-1 location Select the Copy a file froma file Copy thecurrent current the fileto Add anew location Delete the selected file theselected Delete file selected Rename the E F location to a folder on the PC location toafolderonthe ilable on aninstalled stick ilable USB G memory on the jobs forstoring LEC-1 this option tooverwrite this WORKING WITH THELEC-1 H Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely WinLaseUser Guide LAN a file withthe same name a

4 -29 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely

I/O JOB SELECTION It is possible to select and execute an available locally saved job by using I/O bit combinations. In order for the LEC-1 to respond to I/O in this manner, the board must be in I/O Job Selection mode. When in this mode, a maximum of eight user programmable I/O Selection inputs are used to select the pre configured job. The actual inputs scanned by the LEC-1 depend on whether the optional Extended I/O module is installed. See “The Start Mark input is used to start the marking process.” for details. In order to enable I/O Job Selection, please note the following: • The LEC-1 controller must be in I/O Job Selection Mode • Jobs stored locally on the LEC-1 must be assigned to I/O Selection bit combinations. • The appropriate I/O Selection inputs must be set to indicate which job to load/enable. • The Job Select input must be used to trigger the loading/enabling of a job. • After the Job Select input is triggered, the Ready output is used to signal that the job is loaded/enabled.

• The Start Mark input is used to start the marking process.

I/O Selection Extended I/O Extended I/O bit mapping option not installed option installed 00000001 (1) User In 1 User In 5 00000010 (2) User In 2 User In 6 00000100 (3) User In 3 User In 7 00001000 (4) User In 4 User In 8 00010000 (5) N/A User In 9 00100000 (6) N/A User In 10 01000000 (7) N/A User In 11 10000000 (8) N/A User In 12

Mapping Table

4 -30 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en ControllingI/O JobSelection mode 3 2 1 E D C B A A pageThe JobSelection Click the Job Selection tab. page Selection Selection Job Click the Job The appears. warn the user: to displayed is message following The active. currently is that job any abort will dialog WARNING isal LEC-1 the -If appears. window Settings LaserSystem The Settings. Viewer, System Laser click In the and controller LEC-1 anavailable on right-click B pressed, the LEC-1 card will beimmedi or Select thisoptiontoenable Caching the jobs in memory ispreferable memory thejobsin Caching if fast Later,mode. bit Select Job the assignment listare loaded either atboot time, or Loading of jobs can be accomplished in one of two two of one in accomplished be can jobs of Loading ready in I/O Job Selection mode, opening the Settings the Settings opening mode, Selection inI/OJob ready disable I/O Job Selection. When ch When Selection. Job I/O disable is used to quickly switchbetw used toquickly is ately put into I/O Job Selection mode. Job Selection I/O ately putinto switching times between jobs is desired. between jobsis switching times However, when theboard I/OJobSelection in isfirstplaced WORKING WITH THELEC-1 ways. (1) In cache mode, ways. (1) mode, cache In Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely een thepreviously loadedjobs. ecked and after the OK buttonis andaftertheOK ecked WinLaseUser Guide LAN all thejobsinJob G F

4 -31 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely

the time to cache all the jobs in the job assignment list may be lengthy(2) If jobs are not cached, each job is loaded when the Job Select bit is set HIGH and the appropriate selection bits are set. This mode is desirable when the job files are very large, and would consume the local RAM if they were all loaded in memory at the same time. Because the job is loaded when the Job Select bit is set, the process controller must wait for the job to load before executing the job. C Select the location of the jobs • Internal flash memory - The integrated memory on the LEC-1 for storing jobs • External USB stick - Storage available on an installed USB stick D List of jobs available in the current location E Insert the selected job at the top of the Job Assignment list F The list of job assignments. Use this list to assign available jobs to a specific I/O input bit combination. For example, to select the job circle.dat, Bit 2 must be HIGH, and all other Bits must be LOW when the Job Select bit is set HIGH. G Remove the selected job from the Job Assignments list.

To assign jobs to input bit combinations 1 From the Available jobs list, select an available job. Either drag the job into the Job assignment list, or click the Insert at top button to add the job to the list.

2 Delete a job from the Job assignment list by selecting the job and clicking the Remove button.

I/O JOB SELECTION TIMING Once the LEC-1 is in I/O Job Selection mode, the LEC-1 periodically scans (every 400 ms, or 10ms in cache mode) the status of the Job Select input. When the LEC-1 detects that the Job Select input has transitioned (level detection) from GND (LOW) to +5 VDC (HIGH), for at least 400 ms (10 ms in cached mode) it then scans the I/O Selection bits.

• If the I/O Selection bits are all at GND (LOW), this state is interpreted as an Abort. If there is a job actively executing, it will be aborted, and the system will return to scanning the Job Select input. • If the I/O Selection bits represent a specific bit combination, this state is interpreted as an Enable Job (in cached job mode) or Load Job. The Job Assignment list is used to determine which job to activate • If the LEC-1 successfully loaded/enabled a job, the LEC-1 immediately starts waiting for a Start Mark signal. The Ready output is switched to +5 VDC (HIGH), indicating that the job was successfully loaded/enabled and the LEC-1 waits for Start Mark signal. • If there was an error in loading the job, the system returns to scanning the Job Select input. The Ready output stays at GND (LOW). • The Job Select bit must be brought to GND (LOW) to allow the LEC-1 to detect the next input transition.

4 -32 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the Mark on the Fly settings 2 1 C B A C B A The Mark on theFlySettings available. encoder. Ifthe applicationdoes speed. Pulsefrequenciesof up to µs) allows continuous(every10 while they movethrough the mark field. An Mark on the Fly(MOTF) feature. Using Mark WinLasecombinationin LAN, LEC-1, withthe THEFLY ON MARK Click the Mark on the Fly tab. Fly the Markon Click the Settings. viewer, select System and Laser device In the LEC-1 connected on a right-click Select the part movement direction part movement Select the relative markingfield the to av not is encoder If an - encoder an Simulating • Using an - encoder encode An • thepartcan The speedof v 1.5 en will assume a fixed part speed duringthe afixedpart will assume cardcan “simulate” anencoderbyproviding inte tracking of part speed during the mark. This is This mark. the during speed part of tracking be trackedintwoways: when usinganencoder page

notrequire such accuracy, a corrections to the marking ve corrections tothemarking 12.5 MHz can be provided to this input fromMHz canbeprovided anexternal tothisinput 12.5 r, tothemo physically linked RS-422 encoder inputavailable, which RS-422encoder is on the Fly, onthe can bemarked moving objects offers markingofmovingobjectswiththe the most accurate way to mark moving parts. tomarkmoving way accurate themost ailable to track ailable totrack the pa WORKING WITH THELEC-1 rnal pulses to the MOTF system. The system system The system. pulses to the MOTF rnal Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely vement of the part, will allow vement ofthepart,will Simulated encodermode ctor list based onthector listbased part WinLaseUser Guide LAN rt speed, thecontroller E D isalso

4 -33 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Controlling the LEC-1 Remotely

D The current encoder count. Click the Get Count button to refresh E Click this button to refresh the Encoder count value

The Mark on the Fly Settings page when in simulated mode A Enter the actual part speed in mm/s. The system assumes a constant part speed during the marking process.

4 -34 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the Analog servo outputs 1 B A B A The Analog servopage The • The • The • The Initial states of the • The • the Control signal options. WinLase LANmusthaveanactiv ...... CONTROL SIGNALOPTIONS Settings. Click the Outputs Clickthe Settings. Tabamd button. Analog the then viewer, select System and Laser device In the LEC-1 connected on a right-click active job, and switch all lase all switch and job, active command stream and command stream If usinganalog servo amplifiers directly, thevolta If usinganalog servo amplifiers directly, thevolta COM Port Interlocks Laser Pipelinedelay, Analog servooutput , which are four dedicated interlock are fourdedicated , which settingsand inte the laser signals. User Outsignals The followingcontrolsignal voltage range which provides aprogrammabl r signals to their OFF state. OFF state. totheir r signals e connection toan LEC-1 controllerinordertoconfigure rface assignments. rface

ge range of the analog outputs can be selected analog outputscanbe the of ge range selected analog outputscanbe the of ge range WORKING WITH THELEC-1 inputs when signaled, will Abort an Abort inputs whensignaled, will settings can be configured: e delaybetween the galvo WinLaseUser Guide LAN ControlOptions Signal

4 -35 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Control Signal Options

To configure the Initial User Out states 1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 device and select Settings. Click the Outputs Tab and then the Digital button.

The Initial User Out settings page A Check a box to set an output HIGH, and un check a box to set an output LOW when the LEC-1 first starts up, or after an Abort. B The Pipeline delay sets a fixed delay between the galvo control signals and the laser control signals, and is used when connecting the LEC-1 to some digital servo amplifier systems.

To set the Pipeline Delay 1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 device and select Settings.

2 Click the Outputs Tab.

3 Click the Digital button and enter the desired value in the Pipeline Delay.

To configure the Interlocks 1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 device and select Settings. 2 Click the Interlocks tab.

4 -36 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 3 • C B A When an interlock is tripped, the interlock description is displayed is description interlock the istripped, aninterlock When A The Interlockspage Select the “Enable Interlock monitoring” check box check monitoring” Interlock the “Enable Select C B D Enable interlock monitori Enable interlock Each interlock can have a descrip a canhave Each interlock Interlock. monitoring ofaspecific Enable Select if the interlock will trip on a HIGH or a LOW signal input signal oraLOW willtriponaHIGH theinterlock Select if signaled is window iftheinterlock ng. This option must be be must option This ng. tion, which will displayinthe which tion, Each interlock canbeenabled Each interlock independently. selected inorder tomo WORKING WITH THELEC-1 . Run Process or QuickMark dialog WinLaseUser Guide LAN ControlOptions Signal nitor the interlock inputs nitor theinterlock D

4 -37 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Control Signal Options

To configure the COM ports 1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 device and select Settings. 2 Click the COM Ports tab.

A B

C D

E F

The COM Ports page A Select what COM port to use for the Pendant B Select the Pendant port speed. Default is 19200. C Select what COM port to use for the Remote API D Select the Remote API port speed. E Select what COM port to use for the Motion control interface F Select the Motion port speed.

4 -38 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To open the LEC-1 Properties Window 2 1 The • The • The • Theyare: LEC-1. on the states WinLase LANprovidestwodiagnos ...... TOOLS DIAGNOSTIC The LEC-1 Properties Window appears. Window Properties LEC-1 The viewer, System Laser Properties... In the select and device an LEC-1 right-click 1 device. Remote API Interactive Tool I/O Diagnostics ToolI/O Diagnostics Properties Window , which provides an meanstocommunicate with anLEC-1 using the , which displays the current property set , for working with the hardware inputs and outputs on an LEC- outputs on and hardwareworking inputs withthe , for tic toolsforexaminingsettings andI/Oport thecurrent WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN Diagnostic Tools

4 -39 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Diagnostic Tools

To use the I/O Diagnostics Tool • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device 1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 device and select I/O Diagnostics...

A C D

The I/O Diagnostics Tool A The current status of the User In inputs is displayed and updated once per second. B The current status of the Interlock inputs is displayed and updated once per second. C The current status of the User Out outputs is indicated by the state of the pushbuttons. In the screen shot, all outputs are currently LOW. D Use the pushbuttons to change the state of a specific User Out output. The state of the pushbuttons is updated once per second. This option will have no effect if there is no active connection to the LEC-1 device. See “Making a Connection”. E The current status of the System outputs is displayed and updated once per second.

4 -40 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en The I/O Diagnostics Tool Diagnostics I/O The to expanded includedadditional I/O. the optionalIf the Extended I/Oboardisconne include I/Oports the Extended cted, theI/ODiagnostic WORKING WITH THELEC-1 WinLaseUser Guide LAN s Tool expands to Diagnostic Tools

4 -41 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Diagnostic Tools

To use the Interactive tool 1 Right-click the LEC-1 device in the Laser System Viewer and select “Interactive..”..

2 Click the Interactive tab

A D B C

The Interactive Control window A Enter the string to send to the Remote API B The response sent from the LEC-1 is displayed here. C Select the length of time to wait for a response before triggering a time-out exception. D Click the Send button to send the string to the Remote API

4 -42 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To install an update froma provided update file 2 1 NOTE WARNING resident on the LEC-1 board. Th From time to time, Lanm ...... FIRMWARE UPDATES Click Yes, software System forLaser updates Browse appears. the box and dialog appears. warning backup The clickTools WinLase, of menu Main the From software device System ->Laser update. • After updating After thefirmware,the LE • firmware, LEC-1 updatingthe When • (or manually)restartedfo the LEC-1 memory of beenstored intheflash that have lost. It LEC-1 willbe ark Controls Inc. will release an release will Inc. Controls ark is update may be in the form of is updatemaybeinthe is highly recommended to back up any job files r changes totakeeffectr WORKING WITH THELEC-1 C-1 board must beautomatically all filesstoredlocally onthe updated version of the firmware WinLaseUser Guide LAN asingle file, or aweblink. Firmware Updates

4 -43 . . . . . WORKING WITH THE LEC-1 4 Firmware Updates

3 Browse to the provided Update file, select it, and click Open. The Laser System Software Updater appears:

E F C

B D

The Laser System Firmware Updater A List of LEC-1 devices detected on the local network. Select all the devices to update. B On current firmware versions after 1.4.2, the LEC-1 can automatically restart when the firmware update is complete. In order for changes to take affect, the LEC-1 must be restarted after an update session. On LEC-1 devices with current firmware previous to 1.4.2, this checkbox has no effect, and the LEC-1 must be restarted manually. C Click this button to re-scan the network for LEC-1 devices. D After selecting the LEC-1 devices to update, click the Update button to start the process. E The version of the firmware currently on the LEC-1 device. F Indicates whether the update file you have selected is newer, older, or the same version as the version currently on the LEC-1 device. • Select the LEC-1 boards to update, and click the Update button.

4 -44 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en JOB EDITING ...... 5 .

The Job, with the entities it contains, form the basis for all interaction with a laser marking system. At job execution time, WinLase LAN directs the motion of scanning galvanometers while simultaneously modulating the laser beam, based on the graphical images and laser setttings contained within the job entities. The laser is turned on when a pattern is to be drawn, and off when moving to the beginning of a new pattern location. Entities are placed spatially within the marking field, which is defined by a cartesian coordinate system.

.SETTING ...... UP. . . . THE...... WORKSPACE ......

COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVENTIONS The marking field is defined using a Cartesian coordinate system that is illustrated in the following figure.

Scanning system coordinate conventions

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 5 -1 JOB EDITING 5 Setting up the Workspace

The imaging field is addressed using 16-bit integers with a range of -32768 to +32767. These units are referred to in the following sections as “bits”. All job coordinates are expressed in these units. When a user desires to represent coordinates in other units such as mm, WinLase LAN scales those coordinates appropriately taking into account the projection system optics that are involved.

CUSTOMIZING THE PAGE SIZE Use the Page Setup settings to specify a custom field size area. The custom area can be circular or square and must be smaller in dimension than the maximum field size allowed by the LEC-1 device. The Page Setup settings are saved with the job, so different jobs could have different Page Setup settings.

To modify Page Setup values 1 Do one of the following: • From the main menu, select Job > Settings, then click the Page Setup tab. • Double click the Page Setup item in the Job Manager. 2 The Page Setup Properties window appears.

A B C

The Page Setup property page A Select the format: • Display as Rectangle - The marking field is defined and displayed as a rectangular field • Display as Circle - The marking field is defined and displayed as a circular field

5 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en E D C B Apply the maximum field size width andApplyfield sizewidth themaximum he this buttontousethecurrentClick settings device. LEC-1 the by determined as field sizeheight size. Thissizemu logical field the of The height device LEC-1 the by determined field sizewidthas Thissizemust size. logical field the of The width ight asdeterminedbytheLEC-1 device andwhen apply anewjobiscreated. them st be less than or equal to the maximum available available equal tothemaximum than or st beless be less than or equal to the maximum available available equal tothemaximum than or beless Setting up the Workspace WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING

5 -3 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Opening, Closing and Saving Jobs

.OPENING, ...... CLOSING ...... AND ...... SAVING ...... JOBS......

CREATING, OPENING AND CLOSING JOBS When starting WinLase LAN, a new Job is automatically created by default. See “Default Open and Save Behavior” to configure how WinLase opens jobs when first starting. New Jobs can also be created or existing Jobs can be opened at any time using the File menu or the tool bar buttons once WinLase LAN is running. An existing Job appears with its name displayed in the Title Bar above the menu bar, in the Laser System Viewer, and on the Active Job tab. WinLase LAN supports a maximum of ten open Jobs at the same time.

To start a new Job • Choose File > New Job or click on the New Job button.

New Job toolbar button

To open an existing Job 1 Choose File > Open Job… or click on the Open button.

Open file toolbar button

2 Locate and select the name of the Job to open.

3 Click Open. The Title Bar, Job Manager and Active Job tab updates with the Job name.

4 When finished with a Job, close it individually or close all open Jobs.

To load an available Job in the Touch Screen interface • When running in the Touch Screen Interface, only jobs stored in the Touchscreen Job folder location are available. 1 Click in the Job Manager and select the desired Job from the list of available Jobs.

2 The Job loads and updates the display screen with the marking objects.

To close an existing Job • Choose File > Close Job. The Job is closed.

To close all open Jobs • Choose File > Close All Jobs. All the open Jobs are closed, and the WinLase LAN workspace is cleared.

5 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en existingTo save an Job • • Archive an openan file toaharddrivelocation Archive • Save an open job to aUSBflash device conne • While connectedtoanLEC-1 • While connectedtoanLEC-1 • device. LEC-1 move themtothe When creating jobfiles forSta JOBFILES BINARY) (LEC SAVING STAND-ALONE location. and name Job same the with issaved Job The Savebutton. the clickon or File>SaveJob Choose The • The • buttons: WinLaseseveral wa LANprovides • • marking system.There are two types of The jobfile,with theentitiescontains, it the forminteraction basisforall laserwitha SAVING JOBS device to the LEC-1 device tothe is connected tothedevice LEC-1 job inStand-Alone mode. These files have the extension DAT, andare on the localPC,directlyontheLEC-1ora LEC binaryJob files, the extensionWLJ. PC Jobfiles, thedevice LEC-1 save the Job. for thefirsttime,Save Save Job Save Save Job As Save Job As toolbarSave Job button Save Job toolbar button command saves the Job withits curren which are saved onthelocalonwhich arePCor anetworkresource.Thesefileshave command saves the Job with a different nameor location. which are compiled from a WinLase LAN job, and can be stored stored be can and a WinLase job, from LAN compiled are which As dialog box appears. Specify nd-Alone operation, there are seve nd-Alone operation,there device, directlysavean open device, directly save an opendevice,an directly save ys tosave a Job using the File menu or the tool bar job files thatWinLasejob supports: LAN the files used by the LEC-1 when it loads a USB drive attached directly to the LEC-1. LEC-1. tothe directly attached drive USB cted to the PC and latertransferthected tothePC USB Opening, Closing andSavingJobs Opening, t name and location. Tot nameandlocation. the Jobsave the Job name and where to Job nameand the job toUSBflashdrive which job to the flash memory of jobtothe WinLaseUser Guide LAN ral ways to store files and ways tostore ral JOB EDITING

5 -5 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Opening, Closing and Saving Jobs

Not all object types (Run Application automation objects for example) or special functions within objects (such a operator prompts) are supported in Stand-Alone mode. See “Stand- Alone Job Considerations” for more information.

To save a Stand-Alone Job to a connected LEC-1 • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device, and the job to save must be assigned to that device 1 In the Laser System Viewer, right-click on the job and select “Save to Laser System...”.

2 If the External Start settings have not been configured properly, a warning message will appear. See “To control the job with External I/O” on page 7 -15 for configuration options.

3 From the Location drop down list, select “Internal Flash Memory”.

5 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To save a Stand-Alone Job toa USB flash drive connected to an LEC-1 2 1 3 • options. LEC-1. the to device connected USBflash recognized bea alsomust There device. tothat assigned be must save to the job and device, LEC-1 an to connection anactive be must There NOTE appear. See ExternalIf the Start have not settings been Viewer, System Laser the In on right-click From the Location drop down list, select “Internal Flash Memory”. Flash “Internal list,select down drop Location the From “To control the job with External I/O” on page“To on I/O” External with job the control • When transfering When large jobfiles,itma • USB flash drive while the flash drive whilethe USB flash the job and select “Save to Laser System...”. select“Save the job to LaserSystem...”. and configured properly, configured will message a warning drivre is plugged into the PC. is pluggedinto drivre Opening, Closing andSavingJobs Opening, y befaster to savethejob

-15 WinLaseUser Guide LAN for configuration configuration for JOB EDITING

5 -7 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Opening, Closing and Saving Jobs

To save a Stand-Alone Job to a USB flash drive connected to a PC 1 From the Main menu, select File > Save Job As... The Save Job dialog appears. 2 In the Save as Type drop down list, select “LEC binary Job files (*.dat)”.

3 Browse to the USB flash drive.

4 In order for the LEC-1 to find detect Jobs on the USB falsh drive, the folder hierarchy must be \LEC\Jobs. Create the folder structure on the USB flash drive.

The folder structure for job file storage on a USB flash drive • Copy the file into the Jobs folder.

To archive a Stand-Alone Job 1 From the Main menu, select File >Save Job As... The Save Job dialog appears. 2 In the Save as Type drop down list, select “LEC binary Job files (*.dat)”.

3 Browse to the desired hard drive location to save the file.

5 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en referencedall a Joband To move 2 1 associated graphic files. graphic associated To makemoving Jobs easier, WinLases LAN or adifferentnetworklocation),not Job will the imported graphicfileinit’s original location. If When aJobcontaining importedgraphi LOCATION TO NEW MOVING JOBS Browse to the new location and click Save. click and location new the Browse to appears. Asdialog Package SaveJob The Package... >SaveJob select File menu, theMain From graphic files to a new locationgraphica new files to cs is saved,WinLasecs saves a LAN upports packagingofaJob, withallthe a Job fileismoved toanotherlocation (aPC be able to locate th tolocate beable Opening, Closing andSavingJobs Opening, WinLaseUser Guide LAN e imported graphic file. e imported JOB EDITING reference tothe

5 -9 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Opening, Closing and Saving Jobs

DEFAULT OPEN AND SAVE BEHAVIOR

To edit the Default Open and Save behavior 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. The System Preferences window appears. 2 Click on the Job Files tab. The Job Files page appears.

A B C D

The Job files page A Select options for job loading when the application starts: • Do not load a job - No job is loaded when the application starts • Load a specific job - A specifically named job can be selected to load when the application starts. Click the Browse button to locate the job. • Load a new job - When the application starts, a new, empty job is loaded. • Load the last saved job - When the application starts, the job file that was last saved will be automatically loaded. B The name of the job file, depending on the option selected in A C Select this option to automatically save a backup copy of a Job (with a .bak extension) when the Job is saved. By default, the Automatic backup is enabled and the save location is c:\marker\backup. To change the Automatic back up location, click on the Browse button and select the desired backup location. D Backup job file folder location E Location of job files when using the Touchscreen interface. Only jobs located in this folder will be visible in the Available jobs list in the Touchscreen interface. F Select this option to automatically display the Job Notes when the Job is loaded from disk.

5 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en deviceto anLEC-1JobTo assign a 1 Both test.wlj and circle.wljBoth test.wlj are as The LaserSystemViewer iscircle.wlj Job showingtheActive configuration Offline the to assigned When device an LEC-1 to assigned When Offline configuration device.When a job is not assigned to anLEC- which laserandlensset and order forWinLaseLEC-1 to LAN toknowwhich and WinLase LANwilldisplayal or connectMultiple directlytoaPC.LEC-1de intended to and is device, is anetwork The LEC-1 ...... TOANLEC-1DEVICE JOBS ASSIGNING Laser System Viewer. System Laser tab, the Job itin the it with orselecting selecting by Active assign to Job Make the The job filewill use the laser, le • The job file will use the Offline • job in streaming mode, andtosa job instreaming are associated with the LEC-1 device. It is also possible to execute the between the job and anLEC-1device. job between the cannot beexecuted job files. The . tings to use, the Job mustbe “assigned” toanLEC-1 signed to the signed tothe Offline configuration l theLEC-1devices detectedon 1 device,itisby default assigned to the vices can beattached vices communicatewith when executingjobs, betoinstalledontolocal a area network, Assigning Jobs to an LEC-1 device Assigning Jobstoan ns and motion configuration files that and motionconfiguration ns laser,mo lensand ve the job to the LEC-1 device LEC-1 the jobto ve because there is there because WinLase UserGuide LAN the local area network. In network. area local the JOB EDITING to the samenetwork, to noassociation tion configuration

5 -11 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Assigning Jobs to an LEC-1 device

1 Right-click the job, and select Assign to:.

2 Select the LEC-1 device to assign the job to. The job now appears as a child of the LEC- 1 device.

The Laser System Viewer showing circle.wlj is assigned to the Maestro LEC-1 device and test.wlj is assigned to the Offline configuration

To assign a Job to the Offline configuration 1 Make the Job to assign Active by selecting it with the Job tab, or selecting it in the Laser System Viewer.

2 Right-click the job, and select Assign to:.

5 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To automaticallyassignan LEC-1Jobs device to 2 1 3 A A The Jobfilespage The LaserSystemViewer showingtestjob.wlj Click on the Job Files tab. Files page Job Files the Click on Job The appears. appears. window Preferences System The >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From device. anyLEC-1 of child a longer isno job The configuration. Offline Select Select this option to automatically assi Select thisoptiontoautomatically gn jobs to the default LEC-1 device. tothedefault gn jobs is assignedtothe Assigning Jobs to an LEC-1 device Assigning Jobstoan Offline configuration Offline WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING

5 -13 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Stand-Alone Job Considerations

.STAND-ALONE ...... JOB...... CONSIDERATIONS ...... The LEC-1 supports the ability to execute jobs without the need for a PC. This capability is referred to as Stand-Alone mode. For performance reasons, some features, such as Mark on the Fly, are only available in Stand-Alone mode. To configure Jobs and the LEC-1 for Stand-Alone operation, consider the following:

• If changing strings at run-time, some String based object properties need to be correctly configured for use in Stand-Alone mode, and some are not available.

• The External Start settings need to be configured correctly. • Only Laser Fonts can be used if strings need to be changed at run-time. New Laser fonts can be created for applications where the look of TrueType style fonts is required. See “Creating a new Laser font” for more information. • Only symbologies Data Matrix, and Code 128 are currently available if the barcode string needs to be changed at run-time.

CHANGING STRINGS AT RUN-TIME If the application requires strings contained in Text / Barcode objects to be changed at run time, only the following Source > String rules are available:

• Use AutoDate - The Text / Barcode object will mark a date code according to the format specified

• Serialize with current start value - The Text / Barcode object will mark a serial number using the format specified

• Get string from memory buffer - The Text / Barcode object will retrieve the next string from a memory buffer

• Custom string - The Text / Barcode object will build a custom string according to the format specifier

• Controlled by Remote API - The string contained in the Text / Barcode object can be modified using the Remote API on an Ethernet connection or RS-232 serial port connection.

All other String rules are not applicable to dynamic strings in Stand-Alone mode.

5 -14 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To disable External StartSe To configure the ExternalStartsettings 4 3 2 1 • commands. The ExternalStartcommands. Start an touse External signa not situations External Start settings to verify that External Start is enabled. It may be desirable in some See execution cycle.When ajobis saved toth of thesejobs,anExternal Start signal isusuall Stand-Alone jobs,bydefinition, are executed CONFIGURING EXTERNA down list, select “If Port isHIGH” select “IfPort list, down stateIf the Start External Trigger ofthe the from HIGH, isalways signal drop Mode the Trigger isLOW”. “IfPort from select input), list, the down to drop connected Mode is stateIf the Start nothing External ofthe when LOW (default isalways signal Start External The appears. window Properties Startthe External click then >Settings, Job tab. select menu, Main the From “To page I/O”on External with thejob control ttings in Stand-Alone mode settings canbeconfigured L START SETTINGS e Stand-Alone format,Wi l, andexecutethe job only withRemote API on theLEC-1 device.To controltheexecution y usedtosynchronize thestartofnextjob

7 Stand-Alone JobConsiderations

-15 to support this requirement. . WinLaseUser Guide LAN nLase LAN checks the the LANchecks nLase JOB EDITING

5 -15 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Job Entities

.MANAGING ...... JO . . . B. . ENTITIES...... The Job, with the entities it contains, form the basis for all interaction with a laser marking system. WinLase LAN. Add new job entities:

•By adding a System Entity •By importing a graphic file •By pasting a graphic from the Windows clipboard into the current job

•By pasting a job entity from another WinLase LAN job into the current job

ADDING A SYSTEM ENTITY A system entity includes any of the built in mark objects such as Rectangle, Polygon, etc., and any of the Automation objects.

New Line toolbar button

New Rectangle toolbar button

New Rounded Rectangle toolbar button

New Polygon toolbar button

New Text toolbar button

New Barcode toolbar button

New Automation toolbar button

New Point array toolbar button

To add a System entity to a Job • Select Objects > Add and then select the desired object, or click on the Object from the Tool bar. The selected object is added to center of the Work area.

5 -16 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To Pastea graphic from the WindowsClipboard To import a file 3 2 1 1 WinLaseof th An image LAN. command topasteagr Paste Special Use the A FILE GRAPHIC PASTING NOTE Object). (CompuServe Bitmaps),PCX(PaintBrush)GIF (AutoCad), EPS(Encapsulated (WindowsEMF Metafile), including(WinLase WLJ WLO (WinLase Job), usingthe FilemenuortheImportbutton. Importing files or objects fromother applicati FILES IMPORTING GRAPHIC the newobject. the updates List Object with the fileand imported the Work The Click Open. Areadisplays import. to file the select and Locate button. Import the orclick File>Import, Choose image format, the PasteSpecial appears. the dialog format, image compatible of type contains one than Clipboard Special. more If the >Paste Edit Select Special menu item is grayedout. Import toolbar button Import toolbar • When When importing agraphic ima • will fail to load. file link tothe object in the jobfile. Wh When the job containingthe object graphic file,which includes the fi must (Windows EnhancedMetafile be present at the original loca original at the bepresent e correctformatmust be in PostScript), BMP (WindowsPostScript), B WinLasemany fileformats, import LANcan aphic file from the Windowsaphic filefrom into Clipboard ons into WinLaseons into performed easily LANis Object), PLT Object), WMF (HPGL PlotterFile), , JOB (TruViewJOB , Job), andMCL(TruView ge, WinLase LAN creates a a WinLase creates ge, LAN le nameanditslocationondisk. en thejobisreopened, the graphic is saved,WinLas ), DXF (AutoCAD), DWG ), DXF(AutoCAD), tion of the link, or the graphic the link,or tion of the Clipboard,or the Paste itmap), JPG(JPEGBitmaps), WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Job Entities JOB EDITING e LAN saves the the saves LAN e link tothe

5 -17 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Job Entities

2 Select the desired graphic format to paste. The following options may be available depending on the contents of the Clipboard: • Picture (Metafile) - Graphic is pasted as a vector object. • Device Independent Bitmap - Graphic is pasted as a bitmap object. • Text - Graphic is pasted as a text object.

IMPORTING JOBS A Job is a collection of objects and system settings that describe a set of actions the laser and connected equipment will perform when the Job is run. When a Job is imported, the objects in the imported Job are added to the currently open Active Job. This is in contrast to opening a Job, where the opened Job is added to the list of Available Jobs.

To import a Job file 1 Select File > Import. Click the Files of type drop down list. The supported Job file formats are displayed. These formats are: • WinLase LAN Job (WLJ) - The WinLase LAN Job file. • TruView Job (JOB) - A Job file format developed by General Scanning, Inc. and used on its TruView DOS based software package. 2 Select the desired Job file type.

3 Locate the file to import and select it.

4 Click Open to close the Import dialog window and import the file.

CUT, COPY, AND PASTE JOB ENTITIES The Cut, Copy and Paste commands are usually used in conjunction with one another to move, or copy an object or objects within or between Jobs. WinLase LAN provides several ways to accomplish these tasks using the File menu, Tool bar buttons, or the Ctrl+C, Ctrl+X, and Ctrl+V commands.

To copy an object or objects to the same Job 1 Select a single object or group of objects.

2 Select Edit > Copy, click the Copy button, or press Ctrl+C.

Copy toolbar button

5 -18 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To move an object orobjects to another Job To copy an object orobjects to another Job 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 3 4 selecting Job > and clicking on the desired Job in the list. inthe Job desired the on clicking > and Job selecting tab Job the on the target Availableclicking inthe Select by tab Job Jobs or control, Job. Work current the areaof or Select Edit> Ctrl+X. press objects Cut, click theCut button, The from are the deleted objects. of group or object a single Select target Work the the areaof Job. Ctrl+V. > orpress Edit Paste Select or button, Paste Click the to areadded object(s) The list. inthe Job desired the on clicking > and Job selecting tab Job the on the target Availableclicking inthe Select by tab Job Jobs or control, >Copy,Edit Select Ctrl+C. orpress button, Copy clickthe objects. of group or object a single Select Workthe area. Ctrl+V. > orpress Edit Paste Select or button, Paste Click the to areadded object(s) The the Work area of the target Work the the areaof Job. Ctrl+V. > orpress Edit Paste Select or button, Paste Click the to areadded object(s) The Paste toolbar button Cut toolbarbutton Paste toolbar button Copy toolbar button Paste toolbar button WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Job Entities JOB EDITING

5 -19 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Job Entities

DELETING OBJECTS The Delete command removes the selected object. WinLase Professional provides several ways to do this using the File menu, Tool bar button, Ctrl+Del command, or right-mouse click after selecting the object.

To delete an object or objects 1 Select the object or objects to delete in the Work area or in the Object Manager. 2 Select Edit > Delete, click the Delete button or press Ctrl+Del. The selected object or objects are deleted from the Work area.

Delete toolbar button

USING SELECT ALL The Select All command selects all objects in the Active Job.

To use Select All • Select Edit > Select All. The objects are selected in the Work area and in the Object Manager.

EXPORTING ENTITIES Exporting vector graphic objects is easily performed using the File menu or the Export button. WinLase LAN can export to the following file formats: PLT (HPGL Plotter File) and WLO (WinLase Object).

To export a file • Select the desired object to export. Choose File > Export or click the Export button. The Export Graphic dialog appears.

Export toolbar button

5 -20 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To deselectobjects To select multiple objects Object ManagerTo selectfrom the an object buttonusingan objectTo select theArrow • • • • • • • the newly selected object. newlyselected the Manager. the Object in object adifferent Click on points around anchor appear The now object. the pointsanchor around from areremoved arrowcursor, the The Using object. selected the awayfrom 2pixels atleast click following: Do oneofthe points anchor new currentgroup, willappear. the to isadded object each As group. theshift down Work key, the holding From while area, tothe add to object each on click Manager. Object the in highlighted and selected objectsdesired objectsselecting all are until Continue object. desired next the click on Ctrlkeyand the Manager, down Object the hold Using object, desired first the clickon Manager. Object inthe objects Allselected selection. arehighlighted group a indicate to pointsthem of anchor around set one objects with appear now objects over the all The draga marquee the leftselected. tobe clickand button, mouse arrowcursor, the Using down objects area.Hold desired work nearthe it the place in following: Do oneofthe selection. points ittoindicate around Manager. anchor Object with the appears in now object desired object the That Click on Manager.Object the in highlighted is name object the and selection points indicate anchor itto with appears around now object arrowcursor, area.The the work Using the in object desired the on click been dese has Once anobject boxeshandle surrounds theobjecta work ar object inthe clicking onthe orManager modify anobjec Before ANDDESELECTINGOBJECTS SELECTING Arrow pointer toolbar button t, it needst, it to be selected bycl lected, it must be reselected todo editing. any further be reselected must it lected, nd itcanbe editedbymoving, ea. Once an object is selected, an array of icking on the object inthe Object WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Job Entities duplicating ordeletingit. JOB EDITING

5 -21 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Job Entities

EDITING OBJECTS IN THE WORKSPACE Editing Jobs is made easy in WinLase LAN by means of tools that allow objects to be moved and arranged precisely. WinLase LAN provides tools to move and align, scale and rotate objects, and apply these changes to groups of objects. Objects can also be moved and arranged by using the Dimension Tool. See “Using the Dimension Tool”.

To move an object 1 Select the desired object using one of the selection tools. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” for instructions. 2 Click the object with the mouse, and while holding the left mouse button down, drag the object to the desired location on the work area.

3 Release the mouse button. The object is moved to the new location.

To move multiple objects 1 Select the desired objects to move using one of the selecting tools. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” for instructions. 2 Click the group with the mouse, and while holding the left mouse button down, drag the group to the desired location on the work area

3 Release the mouse button. The object group is moved to the new location.

5 -22 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To adjust the keyboard nudge with thekeyboardobjects group of To nudgea objectwith thekeyboardTo nudgean 2 1 2 1 2 1 A A The Workspace settingspage Click the WorkspaceClick the tab.WorkspaceThe page appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From direction. Ctrl key, the down While holding desired inthe object the tonudge arrowkeys usethe nudge. to the group Select direction. Ctrl key, the down While holding desired inthe object the tonudge arrowkeys usethe to nudge. object the mark Select Enter the amount ofoffsetto apply to the object(s) when usin when apply totheobject(s) g theKeyboard Nudge function WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Job Entities JOB EDITING

5 -23 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Job Entities

To size an object proportionally 1 Select the desired object using one of the selection tools. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” for instructions. 2 Place the mouse over one of the corner handles and the mouse will change to the proportional arrow indicator. Click the left mouse button, and while holding the button down, drag the object to the new proportional size. Release mouse button.

Left: Mouse placed on the upper right handle. Middle: Mouse dragged to size object Right: Object at new size

To size (stretch) an object 1 Select the desired object using one of the selection tools. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” for instructions.

2 Place the mouse over one of the side handles and the mouse will change to the size arrow indicator. Click the left mouse button, and while holding the button down, drag the object to the new size. Release mouse button.

Left: Mouse placed on the right side handle. Middle: Mouse dragged to size object Right: Object at new size

To size a group of objects proportionally 1 Select the desired group of objects using one of the selection tools. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” for instructions.

5 -24 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To size (stretch) a groupof objects 2 1 2 Right: Group at new size Middle:dragged Mouse tosizegroup placedLeft: Mousethe on right sidehandle. Objects”Deselecting Right: Group at new size Middle:dragged Mouse tosizegroup placedLeft: Mousethe on upper handle. right the group of objects of group newsize. the the to drag down, button the indicator.arrow holding while and left the button, Click mouse size the to change will mouse the and handles side the of overone mouse Place the See tools. selection the of objects of one group using desired the Select size. proportional new the to object the drag down, indicator. arrow proportional button the left whileholding the and Click button, mouse tothe willchange themouse and handles corner the of overone Place themouse forinstructions. Release mouse button. mouse Release Release mouse button. mouse Release WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Job Entities JOB EDITING “Selecting and and “Selecting

5 -25 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Job Entities

To modify the radius and rotation of a Radial Text object • Radius - First make sure the object is selected. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” for instructions. While holding down the ALT key, press the up or down arrow keys to increase or decrease the objects radius. If the String orientation is Radial - fixed, the circumference can be directly entered into the Dimension tool. • Rotation - First make sure the object is selected. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” for instructions. While holding down the ALT key, press the left or right arrow keys to rotate the object clockwise or counterclockwise.

LOCKING/UNLOCKING OBJECTS A job entity can be locked to prevent changes to its settings, and to prevent the object from being sized, scaled, moved, or deleted.

To lock an object 1 Click on the desired unlocked object to select it. 2 From the Main menu select Objects > Lock Object, or right click with the mouse and select Lock Object. The object handles change to indicate the object is locked.

Locking is indicated by different grab handles A Unlocked B Locked

To unlock an object 1 Click on the desired locked object to select it. 2 From the Main menu select Objects > Unlock Object or right click with the mouse and select Unlock Object. The object handles change to indicate the object is unlocked.

To lock all objects • From the Main menu select Objects > Lock All. When selected, the object handles indicate the objects are locked. The Lock All menu item will only be available if there is more than one object in the Job.

5 -26 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To undo the last action allTo unlock objects • • is reversed. performed press Ctrl+Z. or The last Select Edit> button, action click theUndo Undo, on th using this LAN providesseveralwaystodo The Undo command reverses up toten actions th ACTIONS UNDOING the objects indicate areunlocked. handles object the Objectsselected, select When menu Main All. the >Unlock From command. Undo toolbar button toolbar Undo e File menu, Toolbare File bu at have been perform WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Job Entities JOB EDITING ed on aJob.WinLase tton, or the Ctrl+Z tton, or

5 -27 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Profiles

.MANAGING ...... PROFILES ...... An Object Profile is the set of laser parameters and scan head parameters specified in the Object Properties. WinLase LAN provides options for saving Profiles, arranging them in a tree structured set of folders, and applying the Profiles to objects. Saved Profiles are displayed in the Profile Manager. By default, the Profile Manager is displayed on the right hand side of the WinLase LAN workspace. See “Profiles Panel” on page 3 -15.

THE DEFAULT PROFILE WinLase LAN applies the Default Profile to a new object when it is first created. Because it is a required part of the system, the Default Profile cannot be deleted or moved to another folder.

NOTE • The Default Profile always uses the Laser and Lens settings from the Offline configuration. See “To select an Offline Lens Correction file” on page 4 -18 and “To select an Offline Laser Driver file” on page 4 -14.

To apply an objects profile to the Default Profile 1 Right mouse click on the object in the work area and select Add to Profiles. The Add Profile window appears.

2 Select “Apply this profile when creating a new object”. The Copy to Default confirmation appears.

3 Click OK. This profile is now applied to all new objects created.

5 -28 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify the Default Profile To apply an existing profile to the Default Profile 3 2 1 3 2 1 • • Profile parameters.Profile Profile. Default the click on Double Profile. Default the clickon mouse Right Modify the Default Profile as desired. See See desired. Profile as Default the Modify appears. Profile window Modify The “Modify”. Select From the Profile Manager,do one of the following: objects allnew to created. applied isnow profile Click OK.The appears. window Default to Copy The Default”. to “Copy Select appears. menu Profile ProfileManager, The the From profile. existing the on click right mouse “Profiles” on page on “Profiles” WinLaseUser Guide LAN

-9 for a description of the the of adescription for Managing Profiles JOB EDITING

5 -29 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Profiles

CREATING AND ORGANIZING PROFILES Object Profiles can be created and organized into folders in a hierarchical directory tree.

To Organize Profiles 1 Do one of the following: • From the Menu bar, select Profiles > Organize Profiles • Click the Organize button. in the Profile Manager.

F D

B C E

Use the Organize Profiles window to create folders, move profiles, rename profiles, and delete profiles A Create a new folder B Move the selected profile to another folder C The properties of the selected profile D Rename the selected profile E Delete the selected profile F The Profile viewer

5 -30 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Profile To adda 1 • • • C B A A object new ProfileAdd Use the windowtoname button. the Add area,click Profiles the From bar, Menu the From Profiles. to >Add Profiles select Profiles. to Add select and object the on click Right-mouse PROFILES ADDING following: the of one Do be saved. to profile withthe Work object the the From area,clickon B C E D The name ofthenewprofile Select thisoptiontoassignthe Select the folder toplacethenewprofileSelect the Create anewfolder Open theProfileviewer as displayedinWinLase LAN profile profile. totheDefault See the profile, itsfolder, select or in if not applying to the Default profilenot applying totheDefault inif apply apply this profile when creating a “The Default Profile”“The Default WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Profiles JOB EDITING D E .

5 -31 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Profiles

MOVING PROFILES Profiles can be moved to another folder in WinLase LAN.

To move a Profile 1 Do one of the following: • From the Menu bar, select Profiles > Organize Profiles. • From the Profile Manager, click Organize.

2 From the Profile list, click on the plus sign to display the profiles in that folder.

3 Click on the desired profile to move. 4 Click Move to Folder. The Browse Folder window appears.

5 Click on the folder to move the selected profile to.

5 -32 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To apply a Profile to a groupof objects To apply a Profile to a single object allJob objectsProfile to a ina To apply 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 • • Click Cancel to cancel the command. the cancel to Click Cancel list. profile the from selected profile the to areidentical folder Profiles the in values profile The Properties. select and object the on click mouse right object, each objects to all marking Click OK profile apply this to Job. Toin the on profile the confirm within aJob. Existing Profiles can be applied to anindivi PROFILES TOOBJECTS APPLYING from the ProfileManager. the from selected the profile to areidentical folder Profiles the in values profile The Properties. select clickand mouse To right object, the to applied been has Profile the confirm object. selected the to areapplied values profile selected The Object”. to Select “Apply appears. menu Profile The object. selected the to apply to Manager, profile Profile desired the From the on click mouse right be applied. will theprofile which Work to the theobject From area,clickon following: of the one Do appears. window Profile confirmation Apply The toAll”. “Apply Select appears. menu Manager, Profile the From on click mouse right objects. of group the to areapplied values profile selected The Group”. to “Apply Select appears. objects. of menu Profile The group selected the to apply to Manager, profile Profile desired the From the on click mouse right groups. select to how on Objects Selecting objects. on of Work group the the section From Seethe area,select dual object,agroup of objects, or all objects the desired profile to apply. profileto desired the Profile The WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Profiles JOB EDITING

5 -33 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Profiles

4 To confirm the Profile has been applied to the objects, right mouse click and select Properties. The profile values in the Profiles folder are identical to the profile selected from the Profile Manager.

To copy an objects profile to another object 1 From the Work area, right mouse click on the object to copy the profile from. The objects Context menu appears.

2 Select “Copy Profile”. The objects profile is temporarily stored in memory.

5 -34 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Profilean existingTo modify To copy an objects profile toa groupof objects 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 5 4 3 2 1 MODIFYING EXISTINGPROFILES Select “Paste Profile”. The profile in memory is copied to the group ofobjects. group the to copied is memory in profile Profile”. The “Paste Select appears. groups menu The to. Context profile the copy to group the clickon mouse Right objects. of a group Select objects memory. The in Profile”. “Copy stored profileistemporarily Select objects appears. menu Context The from. the profile tocopy object the clickon Work the mouse From area,right object. the to copied is memory in profile Profile”. The “Paste Select appears. objects The menu to. profile Context the copy to object the clickon mouse Right Click OK. The new values are applied to this profile. tothis applied are values new Click OK.The Profile parameters. the of adescription 10for Section See asdesired. profile the Modify Or, appears. Profilewindow Modify The profile. clickthedesired double appears. Profile window Modify The “Modify”. Select appears. menu Profile The bemodified. to profile Manager,desired Profile the the From on click mouse right WinLaseUser Guide LAN Managing Profiles JOB EDITING

5 -35 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Profiles

IMPORTING AND EXPORTING PROFILES Profiles created in WinLase LAN can be easily imported or exported by using the File menu.

To import Profiles 1 From the main menu, select File > Import and Export Profiles. The dialog appears.

2 From the Choose an action list, select “Import Profiles from a file”.

3 Click the Next button. The Select file to import page appears.

4 Click the Browse button. The Import from File dialog appears. 5 Locate the file to import and click the Open button.

5 -36 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To export Profiles 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 9 8 • • Click the Finish button. The confirmation window appears. window confirmation The button. Finish Click the Profiles. im -Duplicate duplicates notimport Do overwritten. will be Profiles existing the Profilesimported, asthe name same the with Profiles anyexisting are there -If imported Profiles with duplicates Replace Click the Next button. The Select folder page Selectfolder The appears. button. Next Click the field. filename inthe appears filename The button. Save Click the willfail. exists, Ifthefilealready operation export unique. the is that Type afilename file.Enter the tosave folder thedesired andlocate filename the appears. box dialog file to Export The button. Browse Click the filepage Saveexported appears. The button. Next Click the afile”. to Profiles “Export list,select anaction Choose the From appears. window Profiles Export and Import The ExportProfiles. and >Import selectFile menu, main the From the window. close to OK Click appears. window confirmation The Wizard. the close to button Finish the Click areavailable: options two following Profiles,the importing When If the top Profiles folder is selected, all sub folders willbeexported. folders sub isselected,all Profiles folder If thetop individually.be exported cannot they but reference, for list the in appear profiles The export. to folder the Select ported Profileswillno ported WinLaseUser Guide LAN t overwrite existing existing t overwrite Managing Profiles JOB EDITING

5 -37 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Fonts

.MANAGING ...... FONTS ...... Text Objects created in WinLase LAN can either use TrueType fonts or Laser fonts to generate their graphical representation. TrueType fonts are outline fonts and are installed in the Windows operating system. Laser fonts are specially designed fonts that are installed in the WinLase LAN font library.

ADDING A NEW TRUETYPE FONT TrueType fonts are installed directly into the Windows operating system.

To install a new TrueType font 1 In Windows click Start > Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Fonts applet. The Fonts window appears.

3 From the Main menu, click File > Install New Font... The Add Font tool appears.

4 In the Folders drop down, select the folder that contains the new font. 5 The font will appear in the List of Fonts list. Select the font in the list and click OK.

CREATING A NEW LASER FONT In some Dynamic Text applications, the available Laser fonts may not be acceptable for aesthetic and/or technical reasons. WinLase LAN provides a tool to create Laser Fonts from TrueType fonts. To use a custom Laser Font, consider the following:

• After the font is compiled, it needs to be added to the WinLase LAN font library, which is stored on the PC

• Text objects can be added to a job, and the new Laser Font selected as the Text Object font.

• To use the Laser Font in Stand-Alone mode, the font must also be copied to the LEC-1 card, so it is available as a resource when the job executes locally on the LEC-1 device.

5 -38 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To compile a new Laser font 1 I H G F E D C B A G F E D C B A The LaserFontcompilerutility From the Main menu, select Tools select menu, Main the From compiler... font > Laser I H J library forWinLaseit. LAN toaccess cr After located at\marker\marker\fonts. library is new La the add Select thisoptiontoautomatically Laser font file. character.curves ineach More produce segments allows control optimization Curve object. also be laterintheTextoverridden by Object The character spacing valuecontrolsdefault the space addedcharacters.betweenspacing The can ASCII (32d toASCIIextended 255d)-character The set. • ASCII (32d to 127d)standard- The ASCII character range • set: character Select the The TrueTypeconvert to font by theutility, butcanbeoverriddenwithanothername. in displayed as font Laser new the of name The PLT files • TrueType font • sourceSelect the ofthefontoutlines: copied to the font libra the to copied Click theCompilebutto characters.width ofthe thecharacters Select thisoptiontospace evenly Select the Bold or Italics attr or Italics Bold Select the ry on the LEC-1 device. onthe ry n tocreate the font ibutes beforeibutes font compilingthe over thenumber of straight-lin If the font is to be used in istobeused Ifthefont changing the Character sp WinLase LAN. Thisname iscreated automatically in thefont, ratherthanthem space based onthe a smoother curve, but will increase the size ofthe serfont to WinLase the LANfont library. This eating a new laser font, it must be located inthe located be must it eating anewlaserfont, Stand-Alone mode,beit mustalso e segments used to define the usedtodefine segments e WinLaseUser Guide LAN acing valueoftheText JOB EDITING Managing Fonts J

5 -39 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Managing Fonts

ADDING A NEW LASER FONT TO WINLASE LAN Laser fonts are added to the WinLase LAN font library. Usually, when the Laser font is created, the “Add new font to Laser font library option” is selected. A new Laser font can also be manually added to the Laser font library

To add a new Laser font 1 In Windows Explorer, browse to the folder \marker\marker\fonts on the local drive that WinLase LAN was installed on. 2 Copy the new font into this folder.

WARNING • Adding file types other than a Laser font to the fonts folder will create errors in the way WinLase LAN detects Laser fonts. Copy ONLY Laser fonts into this folder.

ADDING A NEW LASER FONT TO AN LEC-1 DEVICE If a job contains a Text object that uses a Laser font that is not part of the standard Laser font library, and that job is to be run in Stand-Alone mode on an LEC-1 device, then the Laser font must be installed on the LEC-1 device.

To add a new Laser font to an LEC-1 device

NOTE • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device

1 In the Laser System viewer, right-click on a connected LEC-1 device and select “Explore...”.

5 -40 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 4 3 2 Select the new Laser font and click Open. The file is copied to the LEC-1 device. LEC-1 the to iscopied file The clickOpen. and Laserfont the new Select Laserfont. the new to browse and button Add.. Click the “Fonts”. select down, drop in Look the From WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING Managing Fonts

5 -41 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Motion Manager

.USING ...... THE . . . . . MOTION...... MANAGER ...... The Motion Manager provides a method for direct control of installed motion devices. There are two versions of the Motion Manager, depending on the installed hardware.

INTELLIGENT MOTION To interact with available motion devices, check the following: • A motion device or devices are attached to the correct COM port of the LEC-1. See “To configure the COM ports” on page 4 -38 for more information. • WinLase LAN has an active connection to the LEC-1 device. See “Making a Connection” on page 4 -6. • WinLase LAN has a Motion Configuration loaded. See “Working with Motion Configurations” on page 10 -3. • The LEC-1 device is selected in the Laser System Viewer.

To use the Motion Manager 1 If the Motion Manager is not visible, select View > Motor Manager. 2 From the Laser System Viewer, select an LEC-1 device that has a motion system connected.

3 When an LEC-1 device is selected, the Motion Manager updates with a view of the current Motion Configuration.

5 -42 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 4 I H G F E D C B A D C B A The Motion Manager with With the mouse, select an axis to control. The motion control panelcontrol appears. motion The control. to anaxis select mouse, With the G F E K J I H L+ is the positivetravel Limitswitch state. When • When the Home switchstate. the H is • Wh state. switch Limit travel is thenegative L- • states: switch andHome The Limit The individual axismotors The individual A MotionA axistype contained The current Configuratio Motion • Relative - Move theaxisarelativeMove - Relative am • Absolute - Move theaxis • Select anAction: theThe amount axis tomove The current positionof Toun theaxistominuslimit Slew - - limit • To theaxistopluslimit + limit - Slew un • Stop - Stop an axisthat is curren • routineHoming a Perform - Home • Stop with an axis immediately The Settings button, used The Settingsbutton, After selecting the selectingthe move After pr units todisp Select the switch. lay in the Motion Manager lay inthe theselected motor an axis motor an axis selected to access the axis speed and acceleration settings. acceleration speed and axis to accessthe ofile, clicktheGo button within theMo to absolutepositionF in theMotion out using a deceleration profile. out usingadeceleration n of the LEC-1 n ofthe selected device tly moving using a deceleration profile usingadeceleration tly moving tion axistype ount from the current position using F indicator is Red the switch is signaled. Red theswitchis is indicator K J Configuration til stoppedbyeitherthesoftware orthelimitswitch. til stopped by either th til stoppedbyeither en the indicator is Red theswitchissignaled. isRed en theindicator theindicator th is Red Using the Motion Manager WinLaseUser Guide LAN e softwaree orthelimit JOB EDITING e switch is e switch signaled.

5 -43 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Motion Manager

To change speed and acceleration settings • Click the Settings button. The Settings panel appears.

D E

The axis Settings panel A The acceleration rate of the axis B The deceleration rate of the axis C The initial speed of the motor when it first starts accelerating D The speed of the motor after the acceleration ramp is complete E When working with rotary motion, the radius of the part can be entered

RUNTIME ERRORS When using the Motion Manager, runtime errors may be encountered. These errors are displayed as they are received in the Motion Manager. Click the + to see a list of all the errors received. When the Go button is click, the current Runtime errors are cleared.

Runtime Error logging

5 -44 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Managerthe Motor To use 2 1 B A H G F E D C detected by WinLase LAN. E D C B A The OMScontrollerMotor Manager The MotorManagerisonlyavailableifthe PRODEX OMS CONTROLLER appears. panel Acontrol with. interact axis to panel, Manager amotor Motor select In the Manager. View > select Motor visible, isnot manager Motor If the K J I H G F The amount to move the axis wh axis the The amounttomove The current positionof intheMotionManager display of The units The enabledshown) axes(one Pro-DexThe installed OMS controller card The Stopbutton buttons Jog The The Movebutton Perform ahoming routine The speedtheaxismoves The amount tojogtheaxiswhen theselected axis en the move button isclicked move button the en one of the jog buttons isclicked jog buttons one ofthe J H I OMS hardware is OMS hardwareis inst Using the Motion Manager WinLaseUser Guide LAN alled in the PC and alled inthe JOB EDITING

5 -45 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Dimension Tool

.USING ...... THE . . . . . DIMENSION...... TOOL ...... The Dimension Tool is used to adjust the position, size, and angular orientation of Mark Objects. To set the display units of measure and accuracy, see “Setting the Units of Measure” on page 3 -6. The Dimensions form consists of six tabs: • Rotate, which provides the ability to rotate the selected object or group. • Nudge, which provides the ability to nudge the selected object or group.

• Skew, which provides the ability to shear the selected object. • Position, which provides the ability to move the selected object or group to the indicated position.

• Scale, which provides the ability to scale or mirror the selected object or group. • Size, which provides the ability to change the selected object or group to the indicated size.

Opening the Dimension Tool

NOTE • There must be an object or group of objects selected to initially display the Dimension Tool. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects”.

1 To open the Dimension Tool, do one of the following: • From the Main menu, select Objects > Dimensions. • Right-click the selected object(s) and click “Dimensions...”.

• Click the Dimension button.

Dimension toolbar button

5 -46 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en a MarkTo NudgeObject To Rotate a Mark Object 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 Click on the Nudge tab. page Nudge the Nudge Click on The appears. bar, menu the From selectObjects > Dimensions. settings. indicated the with object the of a duplicate create to Duplicate to Apply Click Optional. Click Apply. rotates object its The about center. Type indegrees. angle desired the in Rotate the Click on tab. Rotate The page appears. bar, menu the From selectObjects > Dimensions. settings. indicated the with object the of a duplicate create to Duplicate to Apply Click Optional. Click Apply. amount. indicated the moves object The Type units. current the horizontal in desired verticalnudge the and in Using the Dimension ToolUsing the WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING

5 -47 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Dimension Tool

To Skew a Mark Object • Skew shears the object in the indicated direction. The following examples show a skewed and an un-skewed Rectangle object.

Skewed by 45 degrees and Un-skewed 1 From the menu bar, select Objects > Dimensions.

2 Click on the Skew tab. The Skew page appears.

3 Type in the desired horizontal and vertical skew in degrees.

4 Click Apply.

5 Optional. Click Apply to Duplicate to create a duplicate of the object with the indicated settings.

5 -48 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Object aMark Scale To a MarkTo PositionObject 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 Click on the Scale tab. Scale the Click on Scalepage The appears. bar, menu the From selectObjects > Dimensions. settings. the indicated with object of the to create duplicate a to Duplicate -ClickApply Optional field. marking of the center objects the the to move center to button Center Clickthe - Optional position. indicated Click Apply. left objects rectangle bottom the the cornerof The to moves bounding Type units. current inthe horizontal desired verticalposition the and in tab. Position page the Click on Position The appears. bar, menu the From selectObjects > Dimensions. Type horizontal inpercent. desired verticalscale the and in Using the Dimension ToolUsing the WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING

5 -49 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Dimension Tool

4 Optional - Enable the Proportional box to maintain the aspect ratio between the height and the width of the object.

5 Click Apply. The object scales from its center.

6 Optional - Click Apply to Duplicate to create a duplicate of the object with the indicated settings.

To Mirror a Mark Object 1 From the menu bar, select Objects > Dimensions. 2 Click on the Scale tab. The Scale page appears.

3 Select the desired Mirror action. The two mirror options available are:

Mirror Horizontally button

Mirror Vertically button

4 Click Apply. 5 Optional - Click Apply to Duplicate to create a duplicate of the object with the indicated settings.

To Size a Mark Object 1 From the menu bar, select Objects > Dimensions.

2 Click on the Size tab. The Size page appears.

3 Type in the desired horizontal and vertical size in the current units.

4 Optional - Enable the Proportional box to maintain the aspect ratio between the height and the width of the object.

5 Click Apply. The object sizes from its center.

5 -50 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Fixedaobject RadialText To Size To Constrain the Size of a Mark Object 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 C B A Click on the Sizetab. the Click on Sizepage The appears. bar, menu the From selectObjects > Dimensions. constraints, isapplied. the scaling no willfitinside constraints. string text If the the tofitinside down theconstraints, scaled than willbe object be larger the (f currenttextstring ifthe marking, When sizeconstraints. the desired Enter box. check size to: constrain marking, When Click the Text with available only is This Constraints button. the Click on radio Objects. Sizetab. the Click on Sizepage The appears. bar, menu the From selectObjects > Dimensions. settings. the indicated with object of the to create duplicate a to Duplicate -ClickApply Optional or example, from a text merge operation) will operation) atextmerge from or example, Using the Dimension ToolUsing the WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING

5 -51 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Dimension Tool

The Radial text size page A The circumference of the text itself. This circumference is represented on screen as a circle drawn with a red dotted line. B The actual height of the ascent portion of a text character. C The actual height of the descent portion of a text character.

To constrain the arc of a Fixed Radial Text object 1 From the menu bar, select Objects > Dimensions.

2 Click on the Size tab. The Size page appears.

3 Check the “When marking constrain arc to:” check box.

4 Enter the desired value.

5 Click Apply. The object redraws with the new setting. 6 Optional - Click Apply to Duplicate to create a duplicate of the object with the indicated settings.

5 -52 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Tool the Align To use 4 3 2 1 • • Click the Align button. Align Click the Tools select menu, Main the From > Align. The Align Tool is useful for aligning ...... USING THEALIGNTOOL area. Click the Reset button to return the objects to their original positions. objects the original their return to to button Reset the area. Click objects the work to the willdo in action see whatthealign to Click thePreviewbutton process. target the align the for becomes object group object the into selected object last the that Note above. other, each shown to settings the use objects of both centers the toalign example, For options. desired alignment Select the following: of the one Do area. See work the in object one than more Select Open Alignment tool Open Alignment two or more objects toeachother. “Selecting and Deselecting Objects”Deselecting and “Selecting WinLaseUser Guide LAN Using the AlignToolUsing JOB EDITING

5 -53

...... JOB EDITING 5 Using the Grid and Guidelines

.USING ...... THE . . . . . GRID...... AND . . . . . GUIDELINES...... In addition to the Align Tool, there are two on-screen object alignment tools that aid in positioning objects in the marking field. They are:

• Grid, which is a series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines that are used to help draw and arrange objects. Use the controls on the Grid/Guidelines window to set the grid's parameters.

• Guidelines, which are lines that can assist in aligning objects. Use the controls on the Grid/Guidelines window to set the guideline parameters.

USING SNAP TO GRID The Snap to Grid command automatically aligns object edges vertically and horizontally relative to the Grid.

To use the Snap to Grid • Select Edit > Snap to Grid or click on the Snap to Grid button.

Snap to Grid toolbar button

To display the Grid The grid can be visible, overlaying on the work area, or it can be hidden from view.

1 To display the Grid over the work area, do one of the following: • From the menu bar, select View > Grid. • Click the Show Grid button on the toolbar.

Show Grid toolbar button

To hide the Grid 1 To hide the Grid do one of the following: • From the menu bar, select View > Grid. • Click the Show Grid button on the toolbar.

5 -54 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To use Snap to Guidelines To modify GridSettings 1 • D C B A D C B Select Edit > Snap to Guidelines or click on the Snap to Guidelines button. Guidelines to Snap the clickon or Guidelines to >Snap Edit Select horizontally relativetothe guideline. The Snap toGuidelinecommand automatically aligns objectedges vertically and USING SNAPTO GUIDELINES A The Gridpage appears. moved nearagridline. Grid settings affect the way the Grid is dr From the menu bar, menu the From selectTools window Grid/Guidelines The >Grid/Guidelines. If this option whenis selected, an Shows or hides the grid. Sets the spacing between the vertically draw Sets thespacingbetweenvertically Sets thespacingbetweenho Snap toGuidelin es toolbar button toolbar es rizontally drawn grid lines, lines, grid drawn rizontally objectis moved near agrid line, awn on screen, and how an and how awn onscreen, n grid lines, inthe Using the Grid and Guidelines in the currentin the units. display currentunits. display the object will theobject WinLaseUser Guide LAN object behaveswhen JOB EDITING snap totheline.

5 -55 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Grid and Guidelines

To add, delete, and move Guidelines An unlimited number of guidelines can be added to the work area. Guidelines can be added, moved, deleted, and cleared. All of these tasks are performed from the Guidelines Setup window.

1 From the menu bar, select Tools > Grid/Guidelines. 2 Click the Setup button. The Guidelines Setup window appears.

B D

C F

The Guidelines Setup page A Select the Horizontal or Vertical tab to manage guidelines. B Enter a position C List of current guidelines. D Add a guideline at the position specified in B E Move a selected guideline to a new location as specified in B F Delete the selected guideline G Clear the list of guidelines

To display the Guidelines The Guidelines (if there are any set) can be visible, overlaying the work area, or they can be hidden from view.

NOTE • If there are no Guidelines set, the Show Guidelines feature is disabled.

1 To display the Guidelines over the work area, do one of the following: • From the menu bar, select View > Guidelines.

5 -56 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Guideline Settings the GuidelinesTo hide 1 1 • • • C B A A The Guidelinespage behaves whenmoved near a Guideline Guideline settings affecttheway the Guidel toolbar. the on button Guidelines Show Click the bar, menu the From selectView >Guidelines. toolbar. the on button Guidelines Show Click the appears. bar, menu the From selectTools window Grid/Guidelines The >Grid/Guidelines. To following: the of one do Guidelines the hide C B without displaying Restores theGuidelines as they we If this option whenis selected, an Shows orhides the Guidelines. Show Guidelines toolbar button Show Guidelinestoolbar the the guidelines. objectis moved near aGuideline, re in thisse saved theJob. If ines aredrawnon screen, and how an object Using the Grid and Guidelines lection is notchecked,the loadsJob WinLaseUser Guide LAN the object will snap to the line. the willsnapto theobject JOB EDITING

5 -57 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Grid and Guidelines

GUIDELINE PRESETS WinLase LAN can save different combinations of Guidelines to the Preset library. This feature is useful if there are many different tooling sets, and a quick method is needed to set up for each tool. The Preset options are:

• Load Preset, which loads a pre-saved Guideline set into the work area. • Save Preset, which saves the current Guidelines to a Preset. • Organize Presets, which renames and deletes Presets.

To save a Guidelines Preset 1 From the menu bar, select Tools > Grid/Guidelines.

2 Click the Setup button. 3 If there are no Guidelines set, add the desired horizontal and vertical Guidelines.

4 Click the Save Preset button. The Save Preset window appears.

5 Select an appropriate name for the new Preset, and click the OK button.

To load a Guidelines Preset 1 From the menu bar, select Tools > Grid/Guidelines. 2 Click the Setup button.

3 Click the Load Preset button. The Preset window appears.

4 Select the desired Preset. 5 Click OK to apply this Preset, Cancel to quit.

6 The Preset values appear in the Guidelines Setup list.

5 -58 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To renamea Preset Preset To deletea 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 7 Edit the Preset name asdesired. name Preset the Edit Preset. the to next appears box edit An button. Rename Click the rename. to Preset the desired Select Presets Organize PresetsClick the Organize The appears. button. window button. Setup Click the bar, menu the From selectTools >Grid/Guidelines. list. the from removed and deleted Presetis The button. Delete Click the delete. to Preset the desired Select Presets Organize PresetsClick the Organize The appears. button. window button. Setup Click the bar, menu the From selectTools >Grid/Guidelines. Click away from the Preset. The new Preset name issaved. name Preset new The Preset. the from Click away Using the Grid and Guidelines WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING

5 -59 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Using the Zoom Tools

.USING ...... THE . . . . . ZOOM...... TOOLS ...... • There are three tools available to change the zoomed view of the work area: • Zoom In Tool, which provides methods to zoom in on a specific place in the work area. • Zoom Out Tool, which provides methods to zoom out, reversing the zoom in actions. • Full Field Tool, which returns the work area to the default full field area view.

The scroll bars on the right and bottom of the work area can also be used to scroll the current view of the work area.

Using the Zoom In Tool 1 Click on the Zoom In button. The button stays depressed, and the mouse cursor changes to the zoom in cursor.

Zoom in toolbar button

2 While holding the right mouse button down, drag a marquee around an object in the work area. The marquee box updates the screen.

Zoom Marquee around Rectangle • Release the mouse button. The new work area extents become the window that the marquee defined. The Zoom In button returns to its off state, and the mouse cursor returns to its default. • To repeat the process, click the Zoom In button again.

5 -60 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en UsingTool theFullField Out Tool Using theZoom 2 1 3 2 1 The work area returns to its to workareareturns The size. default Click on the Full Field button. To again. button Out Zoom clickthe process, the repeat out. workareazooms The Click on the Zoom Out button. Show full fieldShow full toolbar button Zoomtoolbar out button WinLaseUser Guide LAN Using the Zoom Tools JOB EDITING

5 -61 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Printing Jobs

.PRINTING ...... JOBS ...... WinLase LAN can print an image of a Job as it appears on screen. WinLase LAN provides several ways to print Jobs using the File menu or the Toolbar button.

To print a Job 1 Select File > Print Setup. The Print Setup dialog appears. • Click the Print button.

Print toolbar button

2 Select the desired printer from the drop down list. 3 Select the desired paper size and source.

4 Select the desired orientation of the Job.

5 Click OK. The Job prints to the selected printer.

To adjust the print layout of a Job before printing 1 Select File > Print or click on the Print button.

Print toolbar button

• The Print Layout dialog appears.

A B C

E F

The Print Layout dialog A Objects will print the actual size. B Scales the Job so that it fits on the page.

5 -62 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en E D C F Forces thewidthandto height Changeswidththeheight and oftheJobtobeprinted. printed Job. height ofthe center the in solocated thatit's Job the Adjusts Displays the field sizeboundariestheDisplays ontheprinted Job. maintain aconstantratio. of thepage.width Select thistoadjust the and WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB EDITING Printing Jobs

5 -63 . . . . . JOB EDITING 5 Printing Jobs

5 -64 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en JOB ENTITIES ...... 6 .

This chapter provides an overview of the Job Entity types. There are three types of Job Entities:

• Mark Objects consist of lines, rectangles, polygons, text, barcodes, imported vector files, imported bitmap files and drill points. These objects represent the pattern the laser will mark.

• Automation Objects consist of I/O functions that set or get the state of I/O ports, Time Delays, displaying of Message Boxes, and multi-axis Motor Control objects. These Automation objects are usually used for interfacing to and controlling external equipment.

• The Template Object, which provides a graphic that is displayed in the work area, but is not a marking object.

.WORKING ...... WITH ...... JOB...... ENTITIES ...... Each entity has a set of properties that can be modified, and these settings can be edited by selecting the object and selecting Objects > Properties, pressing F2 on the keyboard while a single object is selected, or right-mouse clicking on the selected object and selecting Properties.

To view and set Entity Property Values 1 Click on the desired object to select it.

2 Do one of the following: • From the Main menu, select Objects > Properties. • Press F2 on the keyboard.

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 6 -1 JOB ENTITIES 6 Working with Job Entities

• Right-mouse click on the selected object and select “Properties...”. The Properties window appears for the selected object.

3 Edit the property values as desired. 4 Click Apply to leave the Properties window open, or click OK to apply the changes and close the Properties window.

CHANGING THE NAME OF AN OBJECT You can change the name of the job entity as it appears in the Object Manager.

To change the Name of the Object 1 Click on the desired Object in Object Manager.

6 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 2 The object name asitapp Enter theobjectname Right-mouse click and select Properties. The Properties window appears. window Properties The Properties. select and click Right-mouse ears in the Object Manager ears intheObject WorkingJob Entities with WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES

6 -3 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Working with Job Entities

ADDING NOTES TO AN OBJECT All objects have a Notes property, which you can use to save details about the object. The notes property is only visible in the User Interface.

To add a Note to the object 1 Click on the object to be modified. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the Notes Tab. The Properties window displays the Notes settings:

6 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify External Control settings 2 1 NOTE or disable mark Controlto Enable Use External CONTROL EXTERNAL the WinLasebuilt-in systemobjects. LAN the lasertoproduceamark. Mark entitiescan be defined as ...... MARK ENTITIES Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse bemodified. to Object the Click on • This feature is ONLY feature This is available wh • mode. any entity type that controls the motion of the scan head and any entitytypethatcontrolsthemotionhead ofthescan Mark entitiesconsistof importe ing ofthe entity base en running the jobinStand-Aloneen running WinLaseUser Guide LAN d graphicsfile JOB ENTITIES d on discrete I/Oinput. Mark Entities s aswell

6 -5

. . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

3 Click on the Ext. Control tab. The Properties window displays the ExternalControl settings.

A B

The property External Control page A Select this option to enable External Control. When the Job is run, the object will check the I/O ports, and if they match the configuration selected in D, the object will mark, otherwise, it will be skipped. B Selects the I/O ports to be used during the process. Only User In 1 - User In 20 are available when working with an LEC-1 device. C Select the Control logic: • Scan ALL inputs (AND) - All the inputs on the LEC-1 device are read and then compared to the configuration in D. If every input matches D, then the object is marked • Scan ONLY checked inputs (OR) - All the inputs on the LEC-1 device are read and then compared to the configuration in D. If just the inputs checked in D match, even though other inputs may actually be set on the LEC-1 device, the object is marked. D Select a checkbox to require the input to be HIGH, deselect the checkbox to require the input to be LOW.

6 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Crosshatch90 at0and degrees, Crosshatch at -45anddegrees 45 angles ofeachsetlines. In additiontoparallel lines, acrosshatchstyle is and afilledText An unfilled resized. eliminatesneed the toregenerate object the artwork witheach newfill timeobject the is benefit: as the object is scaled and sized, the fill maintains a constant spacing. This optimal value isdetermined, it laser wa onoptimal spacingvalueisdependent marked objects. An important parameter in fill is the spacing between each fill line. The See ve the beginningoffirst polyline objectswhere dimensional object type (exc WinLase LANhastheability toaddfill lin FILL (HATCHING) “Understanding Closed Paths”

entity using parallel lines entityusingparallel ept Bitmaps and Dot Matrix). can be saved with theobjec can besaved . Fill is usuallyusedtocr . Fill es inside closed paths within anytwo- inside closedpaths es velength, spotsize,ma available, withcustomizedsettings forthe ctor alignsctor e withthe t. WinLasean added LANhas Closed paths are definedas eate a “solid look” tothe eate a“solid WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES terial, etc.Once the nd of the last vector.the last nd of Mark Entities

6 -7 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

To modify Fill values 1 Click on the object to be modified. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. The Properties window displays.

3 If the object has closed paths (a contiguous series of connected vectors that start and stop at the same point), the Fill tab will be visible. Click the Fill tab. The Fill page appears.

A B C D E

The property Fill page: A Enable or disable filling (hatching) objects B Select the Style: • Parallel lines • Crosshatch • Bidirectional C The distance between adjacent fill lines. D The angle from the X-axis for the parallel fill or bidirectional fill, or the first set of fill lines in crosshatch fill. E The angle from the X-axis for the secondary fill lines when using the crosshatch style.

6 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To show the Profiles page 1 • • the marking Profiles, andarranging them inatree structuredoffolders.set these settingscan besaved Profilein the lib After the object. when marking Select a mark object, then from the menu bar, menu the from then a mark object, Select Objects select >Properties. “Properties...”. and select object amark clickon mouse Right page Saved Profiles are displayed inthe Profile Ma marking paraAn ObjectProfiledefinesthelaser PROFILES Example ofaclosed path withfournodes Example ofanopen path vect forall basis the is The path CLOSEDPATHS UNDERSTANDING Do one of the following: of the one Do displayed on the right ha the right displayed on paths. WinLasemeet. points whose startandend LAN one withunconne is An openpath open orclosed. made may be of which each lines andcurves, connected bytwoormoreanchorpoints. Paths

-15 . nd side of the WinLasend sideofthe See LANworkspace. developing laser-marking paramete or objects. A pathobjects. ismadeup A or rary. WinLase LAN provides a meansof saving up ofmanyconnecting nager. By default, th can be made from a comb made from can be meters and scanheadpa meters cannot fillobjectsunl cted end points, while a closed path is one a closedpathis points,cted end while of one or more linesegments one or of WinLaseUser Guide LAN e Profile Manager is rs for different materials, JOB ENTITIES points. Paths can be points. Pathscan ess they are closed ess theyare “Profiles Panel”on rameters to beused rameters Mark Entities ination ofstraight

6 -9 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

• Select a mark object and then press the F2 key.

A B C M

D N E O

F P G Q H R I S J T K U L V

The Profiles page A Select the marking Mode: • Mark once - The object will mark once with the selected Profile parameters. • Mark Multiple times - The object will mark the number of times indicated in the Passes field. • 2 pass Cut and Clean - The object will mark twice and each pass has its own Profile settings. To modify different Profile settings, select them with the Current Profile box. • 3 pass Cut and Clean - The object will mark three times and each pass has its own Profile settings. To modify different Profile settings, select them with the Current Profile box. • 4 pass Cut and Clean - The object will mark four times, and each pass has its own Profile settings. To modify different Profile settings, select them with the Current Profile box. If the Use pens checkbox is checked, 2 pass Cut and Clean, 3 pass Cut and Clean, or 4 pass Cut and Clean is not available. B When the Mode field is set to 2 pass Cut and Clean, 3 pass Cut and Clean, or 4 pass Cut and Clean, or the Use pens box is checked, the Current Profile box selects which Profile is currently displayed. If displaying pens, the associated pen color is displayed to indicate which line segments in the

6 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en H J I F G D K E C M L vector in a series. For best performance, Mark For bestperformance, vector inaseries. next command. For thisreason,a mi the ofmarking end ofaseries At the vectors, has to be of theLaserOffDelay inserted atthe Delay isautomatically LaserOff A it mustbeturn immediately; off not beturned should lag.Wh iscalled values these two mirroreach of position and theactual during exe assemblymove thefocuspointto upand do ou z-axis The positiontomovethe (polyline). marking vectors corners ofthepolygon.To control Delay a Poly this occurring wh lag The time vector. order In to reach results, marking acceptable Many applications require laser the Q-Switchfrequency. and Clean, 3 pass Cutand Clean, or4passClean, Cutand usingpens isnotavailable segments theline in which the Current Profile control updates withinoneobject to line segments Depending on theprogrammed MarkSpeed, a d matche Delay hastobe automatically insertedbefore the beforethe mirrors have reached theprogra marking defined the acceleratedupto be to have velocity.mark a Scan Headfirstexecutes When the Configuration file, the frequencyva ataconstant changingorlamp diode the current. OnCO2type Controlsthe output laser. power ofthe OnYAG indicated inthePasses times willusethecurrentobject Profile Controls the Waveform modeofthe laser. Curr Controls the repetition rate ofthela number ofmarkingpasses for theob available whentheMark is only field The Passes object. information is usually found in file only is box pens check The Use the laserpower. featureselected. This if is useful using certain la hascompletedma object the After the units are the percent (%)orWatts. d with the Mark d withthe Speed. ile executinga ofmarking series vect the object are drawnscreen on WhenModethe is setto2pass field Cut field, even though it only appe it only even though field, lue controlslue power. Depending matched withtheMarkSpeed matched available when the object contains extended pen information. Pen Pen pen information. extended contains theobject when available marking withoutvariationininte . can . Changes be madetothecu be assigned different Profiles. start of a series of marking vectors. The length of the LaserOn LaserOn the of The length vectors. ofmarking ofaseries start en the commandvalueof en the rking, the laser power will bese rking, thelaserpower tput device. This is This typically tput device. Mark Delay is automatically in isautomatically Mark Delay s of type *.PLT,s of *.DW and *.DXF with the pens available intheob with thepensavailable ser control signal. OnYAG lasers, ject. When running the Job, runningtheJob, the When ject. mmed angular velocity, aLaserOnDelayis wn inrelationto ently supportedsystems. ently G3 laser only withSPI Speed and Mark Delay have to be wellmatched. be to have Speed andMarkDelay rrorsbefore to astop settle have to the executing type lasers, this is typically accomplished by accomplished type lasers,thisistypically ifference occurs between ser types that require a separate signal to control Multiple times mode is selected. Enter thedesiredselected. Enter modeis Multiple times cution ofavector. Thedifference between intime end of every series ofma lasers, varying the puls the varying lasers, speed. Tospeed. make sure the ing vector, themirrors galvanometers onthe is inserted between each vector isaseriesof vector each between is inserted ed off after adelay,ed offafter to it is necessary tomark it isnecessary the end of a vector isreached,of avector theend thelaser ars intheObject List once. the markingthe surface. on the settings in the Laser settingsinthe the on used with a linear used withalinear translator ors results inarounding ofthe When the Use pens box When Usepensbox is checked, the serted afterthelastmarking nsity at the start or end of aofnsity atthestartorend rrent Profile andsavedwiththe t to zerot if thisoptionis % WinLase UserGuide LAN ject, and the associated color andtheassociated in ject, G.. Using pens allowsdifferent object object will mark numberof the this is usually referredthis isusually toas JOB ENTITIES e width while maintaining width whilemaintaining e the commanded position the commanded laser is not switched on laser isnotswitched rking Thelength rking vectors. compensate for the lag. forthelag. compensate vectors withaconstant vectors Mark Entities

6 -11 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

N Controls the speed with which the laser spot moves on the target while executing a marking vector. The laser is on during the mark. O Controls the pulse width of the laser control signal. On CO2 lasers, this parameter is not available, as it is set automatically based on the value in the Laser Power field. For example, if the Laser Power field is set to 50% and the Frequency field to 5 KHz, the pulse width will be set automatically to 100 µs. P Controls the speed with which the spot moves while “jumping” to the start of the next marking vector. The laser is off during the jump. Q Before executing a jump command, the Scan Head mirrors have to be accelerated up to the programmed Jump Speed. This acceleration results in a time lag. After the jump, the mirrors need time to settle to a complete stop. In order to take into account the time lag and settling time, a Jump Delay is inserted automatically at the end of every jump vector. Note that a higher Jump Speed requires a longer Jump Delay. The entire time taken by a jump consists of the jump time and the Jump Delay and can be minimized by choosing optimum values of Jump Speed and Jump Delay. R Jump delays sometimes need to be longer for larger jumps, and shorter for smaller jumps. When a jump length is greater than the Vari. Jump Length, the Vari. Jump Delay is applied. When jumps are smaller than Vari. Jump Length, the standard Jump Delay is used. To disable, set to 0. S Jump delays sometimes need to be longer for larger jumps, and shorter for smaller jumps. When a jump length is greater than the Vari. Jump Length, the Vari. Jump Delay is applied. When jumps are smaller than Vari. Jump Length, the standard Jump Delay is used. T When Wobble Width is greater than 0, the beam dithers (moves in a very small circle) while marking a vector. Changing the Wobble Frequency controls the speed at which this circle is moved. U When Wobble Width is greater than 0, the beam dithers (moves in a very small circle) while marking a vector. This has the effect of making the marked line wider. Changing the value of Wobble Width controls the width of the marked line. V Select this option to place the laser in CW Mode. This option is only available on SPI G3 lasers.

6 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To displayestimated markingtimes 2 1 • • • D C B A commands for the Y and Zaxes commands fortheY The followingfiguresequence shows the of applied to the galvos atregular LEC-1 takesavectoranddivides vectoring.This process isillustrated inth Controlled velocitymarking ANDDELAYS MICRO-VECTORING A The Performance detailspanel F2key. the objects ofmark press then orgroup and a markobject Select Properties. >Object select Mainmenu, markobjects, the of from oragroup then a markobject Select objects of “Properties...”. or group select and object amark clickon mouse Right The estimatedmarkingt ESTIMATING THEMARKTIME marking times. marking the details show to Performance Clickthe button appears. window Properties The following: of the one Do E D C B command at eachupdate period. by is controlled interval.galvo speed The the in can bedisplayed G F H The total theoretical marking The total number ofmarkin The total The total timeofallthemarking vectors The vectors total timeofallthejump The total timeofallthedelays The total number ofmark The total The total number ofjump The total The total number ofjump The total objects Properties window.objects Properties ime foranobjectorgr vectors in the fill portion of the object /group object the of portion inthefill vectors ing vectors in the fill portio vectors inthefill ing vectors in the outline portio intheoutline vectors g vectors in the outline por vectors intheoutline g and jumpingisaccomplished through aprocess call micro- time for the object /group object the for time lyspaced timeintervals.This are similarareand strictlylocked intime withthe Xaxis, it into multiple shorter segments (micro-vectors) that are e followingmarkingfigure.e engineofthe The the magnitude of the change in the output typical output commands for the X axis. The oup ofobjectsiscalcul n of the object / groupobject n ofthe n of the object /group object the of n tion of the object / groupobject tion ofthe interval is knowninterval is astheupdate WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES ated automatically and ated automatically Mark Entities H G F E

6 -13 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

differing only in magnitude of the discrete steps. As the X axis reaches successive targets X1,X2, etc., so do the Y and Z axes reach their corresponding targets, Y1, Z1,Y2, Z2, etc.

X Galvo output 1 command

dX X3

Galvo X2 response X4

Update

Micro-vector operation Because laser scanning systems are electro-mechanical in nature, various delays must be employed to compensate for inertial effects of the mirror and motor structure. These effects generally result in a positional lag of the deflection mirrors relative to the electrical command to make them move. These delays are used to properly time laser on/off and modulation signals relative to the mirror positions. In addition to compensating for lag times, the delays can be used to compensate for transient instability in mirror positions after a step to a new location. The following figures illustrate these effects.

Each system configuration requires fine-tuning of delay commands to ensure full and complete marking with no over burns. The individual delay settings are dependant on the dynamic response of the galvo/mirror combination in use, and the sensitivity characteristics of the marking medium. Determining these delays is typically a trial-and-error process. The delays are specified as part of the job definition described in the next section.

Laser Off Delay

Laser On Mark Poly Delay

Laser

Micro-vectoring and laser timing relationships

6 -14 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Optimizing the Jump delay (marking time) (marking time) increases. a JumpDelay will haveno visibl tostartbeforecause marking mirr beforeMarking starts Jump Delaytooshort: mirr oftheJumpCommand Effects jump. jumpthe lengthof speedand ga of mirrors,type (weight Acceleration and deceleration ti the jump as it decelerates to precisely the correct speed required for accurate marking. acceleration. Likewise, the system will require a certain delay (settling time) at the end of crea inertia andsystem mirror accelerations, ideallythe at fastest speedpossible tominimize overall markingtime. Aswithall During a jump, the scan head mirrors accelerate Jum Command: set position

Mark Jump Mark Jump jump delay delay jump (unstable Mark la Mark g Mark Mark time Jum e effect, but marking is delayed so overall job productionoverall job isdelayedso but marking e effect, time lvanometer, etc.),andwill va p ors are properly settled,resultingin mes and settling times will vary from system to system Jump actual

Mark ors properly Too settle. will short of JumpDelay te a slight lag at thelag at beginningofthe te aslight Mark Mark to rapidly to get to the next mark position, Jum ry depending on the requested inadvertent Too marking. longof WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -15 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

Optimizing the Mark delay A mark delay at the end of marking a line segment allows the mirrors to complete the move to the required position prior to executing the next mark command.

Jum

Mark Mark

Jum

rk k a r p a M rk a M M Mark Jum Jump Jump

Mark Mark Mark

Mark Delay too short: Marking continues into a jump vector. Too short of a Mark Delay will allow the subsequent jump command to begin before the system mirrors get to their final marking position. The end of the current mark will turn towards the direction of the jump vector, as shown to the right. Too long of a Mark delay will cause no visible marking errors, but will add to the overall processing time.

6 -16 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en LaserOptimizing the OnDelay started beforeswitched on thelaserhas Laser OnDelay too sklong: Marking startstoolate, Bu short: On Delaytoo Laser inertias, and laser value andwill vary with diff This “up tospeed”beforemarking. Etc.) are micro-stepscommand ofamark toensurethe thatmotion laser'scontrol systems (mirrors, in time before the laser is turned on is typica prevent burn-in The LaserOnDelaycanbeusedto Jum Jum

Mark Mark Mark Mark Jump Jump activation timings.

Mark Mark Mark Mark rn-in atvector rn-in start points Mark Mark Mark Mark erent systems andlasers because of galvo motor and mirror Jum Jum p p Jump Jump

Mark Mark Mark Mark llylaser usedtoturnonthe after the firstfew Mark Mark delay can have either a positive or a negative a a positiveor have either delay can ips vector mark start the vector haspoints because effectsthe at start ofavector. This delay Jum Jum WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -17 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

Optimizing the Poly Delay A polygon delay is a delay automatically inserted between two marking segments where two vectors meet. The minimum delay allows enough time for the galvos and mirrors to “catch up” with the command signal before a new command is issued to move on to the next point.

Jum

Mark Mark

Jum rk a rk p a M rk a M M Mark Jum Jump Jump

Mark Mark Mark

Poly Delay too short: Characters not well formed

Jum

Mark Mark

Jum

rk k a r p a M rk a M M Mark Jum Jump Jump

Mark Mark Mark

Poly Delay too long: Burn-in at vector junctions

6 -18 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en LaserOptimizing the OffDelay delay willcause burn-inattheendofa delay long: Markingst too Off Delay Laser willcause skippingofvectorendpoi delay short: Marking too Off Delay Laser th variations ofintensity desiredto stop.The goal is to adjust theLa micro-stepsfew command ofamark toensure timebeforethe laserturned is offtypically is usedtoturn offthe laser justbeforelast the The LaserOffpreventto burn-in used Delayis Jum Jum

Mark Mark Mark Mark Jump Jump

Mark Mark the desired vector.roughout Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Jum Jum p p stops too soon, skipping vector endp stops skipping toosoon, opstoo late,burn-in atvector end Jump Jump vector wherelaser the nts offtoo as thelaserswitches early.

Mark Mark ser Off Delaytoensureuniformmarkingwithno Mark Mark Mark Mark that the marking stopsit is the markingexactlywhere that effects endofavector. at the in delay This Jum Jum stays on too long. stays on WinLaseUser Guide LAN points.Typically, too long ofa oints. Typically,too shortofa JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -19 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

Tips on optimizing Profiles Take care of the basics when setting up a scanning system. Best results are achieved when the input beam is perfectly aligned cleanly into the scan head without contacting non- transmissive surfaces, expanded and collimated so the energy floods the mirrors without overspill. eg. using a 10mm scan head, the entry diameter is just under 10mm. Larger and the beam will contact the housing, causing interference, and compounding the focus at the target.

Pay strict attention to parallelism between scan head and target. Be aware the wider the angle scanned to the field extremities, the more the spot will change from a perfect circle, and when using focusing lenses after the mirrors, more diffraction will be introduced.

1 Ensure any pointer laser is aligned to the main processing beam. Mark 5 points (center and corners), and position the pointer to the same points, adjusting until it falls perfectly on the marks.

2 Mark a series of 10 close parallel lines across roughly half the field size. Do not worry about the starts and ends of the lines at this point. The first goal is to find the best laser and marking speed settings for the absorption of the energy by the target material. 3 Set Line 1 at the minimum and Line 10 at the maximum Mark speed you feel would suit the material. Set Lines 2 to 9 in incremental Mark speed steps between the minimum and maximum. This gives an indication of the best results, but may be slower or faster than expected. You may need to adjust the speed range and mark again. When you have a good result, reduce the range to fine-tune the Mark speed.

4 Set the best Mark speed to all lines. Set a range of incremental laser frequencies between the minimum and maximum you feel may suit the material and mark again. Different materials may absorb differently at differing frequencies, and you may see further improvements.

6 -20 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 10 7 6 5 9 8 speed slightly until Point E is clear again. Eisclear Point until slightly speed Estarts Point Jump until the Reduce speed Jump the lose position. increase to Now before marking the calibration lines E-F-G. calibration the before marking viaC-D-E, marking without double-jump willthen scanners The A-B-C. lines index of thefield,starting inits 80% fileis willmarkover The withthe and form simplest byadouble-Jump. joined marked, willbe lines 4simple graphic. delays the import folder. and Job marker/graphics/vector a new Open inthe place file and delays.plt the Download parameters time. same atthe several changing than rather delays, tooptimize approach Use astep-by-step results. steps best the these have you Repeat until optimisation. frequency the for setting the of side either incremental variations Markspeed the repeat and laser parameters, same the set alllines the best havefound you When delay until Point E starts the mark perfectly in the middle of the A-B index line. index the A-B Estarts Point of until delay middle inthe markperfectly the On Laser the reducing Continue laser dependent. and isspeed This 1mm. itto halve roughly 400µswill to delay tail On the Laser the mark.If reducing should is,say2mm, E-F line marked the into leading E.Atail D-E Point direction check the Mark and in (80µs). short relatively delays LaserOff and Poly the and (800µs), long relatively Markdelays and Jump On, Laser the Markspeed, asthe same the speed Jump Set the WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -21 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

11 Now reduce the Jump delay to 400µs. If you see no difference, halve it again. Keep reducing the Jump delay until Point E starts to lose position, then slightly increase the Jump delay until Point E starts the mark perfectly in the middle of the A-B index line.

12 Because a jump is a repositioning of the mirrors, you want to minimise these process timings. The faster the Jump speed, the longer the Jump delay to allow the mirrors to settle, and you may have to reduce the Jump speed to reduce the Jump delay to gain faster overall process times.

13 Now concentrate on Point F where the 2 vectors E-F and F-G meet. If Point F over- burns, reduce the Poly delay. If Point F is rounded, increase the Poly delay until you have a crisp result. 14 Finally, check Point G where the vectors end. Increase the Laser Off delay until Point G ends the mark perfectly in the middle of the B-C index line. Reduce the Mark delay until the mark moves away or over-burns, then reduce slightly until it marks perfectly in the middle of the B-C index line again. You have now set the optimum parameters for the material. Do not forget to save these parameters by adding them to a Profile and naming as your choice (refer to Managing Profiles in the WinLase LAN User Guide provided as a .pdf document in your marker/documentation folder).

6 -22 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Settings Values 3 2 1 H G F E D C B A B A The Settingspage • When the • The onscreen • The Object • Use the Object Settings to configure: • SETTINGS OBJECT Click on the Settings tab. The Settings page displays the object settings values. tab. settings Settings page the object Click on Settings the The displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to MarkObject the Click on D C Jump Change the Change the color ofthese object. Manager,will appearintheObject name This Check this box tomarktheout thisbox Check Select between vector, dotand circlemarking dot st display properties Outline Name Color and Fill lected objectonscreen. will mark will line portion of the object. By line portionoftheobject. de By and in any messages that appear referencingthat appear and inanymessages the yles (not available on releasesall available (not yles ofWinLase). fault, thisfield is enabled. WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -23 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

E If Fill has been enabled, select this option. By default, this field is disabled. F Shows the jump vectors, indicating the path the marking beam spot takes while moving to the next marking vector. By default, this field is disabled. G To mark multiple objects in a job onto a continuous moving part (like wire, etc.), endless sequences of marks can be attained by resetting the starting point of the object using this option. H Enter the spacing, in field distance on the moving part, between successive objects.

6 -24 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Bitmap GraphicTo modify settings 3 2 1 C B A A The Bitmap graphic Settingspage import. or color content.Allcolorimage photographs. WinLasesupports importingb LAN representation. Some images, however, lend th will usually takelongerto time. Th of pixelsata one row the image across vector output device, thisrast bitmap image must“rastered”be torender itwiththe laser.Because scan the headis a that grouping ofpixels A bitmapisarectangular BITMAP GRAPHIC OBJECT for a multi-tonal bitmap. amulti-tonal for tab. values the Settings settings Click on page Settings object The Bitmap the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. tobe Graphic Bitmap the Click on Adjusts the Adjusts the spacing ofpixels within mark a bitmap representation mark abitmap ering action must be simulated, with the laser spot tracing I H G F E D s, however, will be the bitmap image, indots/inch. image, thebitmap emselves only to bitmap marking, i.e. i.e. marking, bitmap to only emselves is can be a time cons is canbeatime form a visual image.In laser marking, the itmap files with monochrome, grayscalefiles withmonochrome,itmap converted tograyscaleinternally after of anobject than avector WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES uming process, and it Mark Entities

6 -25 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

B Adjusts the range between the lightest and darkest pixel. A higher contrast setting will increase this range. C Adjusts the overall lightness of the image. Increasing this value will cause the laser to stay on longer at each pixel. D Applies the standard error diffusion algorithm to a grayscale bitmap, converting it to a monochrome bitmap. The pixels are placed in such a way that the image appears to be grayscale. E Reverses the light and dark pixels in the image, using the middle of the range as a reference point. F Forces the lines of pixels in the bitmap to all be marked in the same direction. This improves pixel alignment when marking at high speed. G When marking, pixels that have a value of black (non-marking) will be jumped over by the laser beam, reducing the overall marking time. H When bitmaps are rotated, black pixels may be added to the bitmaps corners. To add white pixels instead, select this checkbox. I Select this option to lock the Y mirrors in place and only scan the X mirrors. The part to be marked is then translated under the marking head in the y axis.

6 -26 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Point settings To modify 3 2 1 A G F E D C B A page Settings The Pointobject object is usedfor a specifically placed poi time. Point objects are usually Pointobjects directthe laser tospecific coordinates andthen turnthe laser onforaspecified OBJECT POINT ARRAY Click on the Settings tab. theSettings Click on page values. Settings DrillObjectsettings The the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. tobe Object thePoint Click on Totalarray. pointsinan of number Note The numberofcolumns inapoint object array. The numberofrows inapoint objectarray. times topulse of The number thelaserisoff The time pulse. on duringasingle laser is time the of The length the mark. The size eachindividual dot isdi pplications such as perforating or drilling into a material. nt objectsareneeded, between successive pulses. between successive the laserthe atea set upasan arrayofpointsarranged inrows andcolumns.If splayed on the onthe screensplayed inWinLase LA that a setting of1createssetting a that single point. a ch dot location. use multiple objectsof WinLaseUser Guide LAN N. This value has no effect on effect This valuehas no N. JOB ENTITIES one point each. This point each. one Mark Entities G F E D C B

6 -27 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

POLYGON OBJECT Polygons are markable objects with a specified number of sides of equal length, each side being the same distance from the center of the object.

To modify Polygon settings 1 Click on the Polygon to be modified. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the Settings tab. The Settings page displays the Polygon object settings values.

A B C

The Polygon Settings page A The number of straight-line segments the object has. For example, to create a triangle, use a value of three. Circles are specified by setting this value to a large number. (> 10). B The angle where the first line segment starts. An angle of 0 is the 12:00 position. C The angle where the last line segment ends.

6 -28 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en RectangleTo modify settings 3 2 1 radius changesas A The Rectangle Settingspage f with objects markable are Objects Rectangle RECTANGLE OBJECT values. tab. Settings page the RectangleClick on the Settings The settings object displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse Rectangle the modified. Click on be to B The radius of the corner as a perca as corner the of radius The The ofstraightnumber linesegments the object is sized. is object the ent of the size of thesize ent of the rectangle. used to make up th used tomake our sides, and optionalour sides, e corner radius. e corner WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES radiused corners. The Mark Entities B A

6 -29 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

ROUNDED RECTANGLE OBJECT Rounded Rectangle Objects are markable objects with four sides, and optional radiused corners. The radius of the corners is fixed and independant of the size of the rectangle.

To modify Rounded Rectangle settings 1 Click on the Rounded Rectangle to be modified. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the Settings tab. The Settings page displays the Rectangle object settings values.

A B

The Rounded Rectangle Settings page A The radius of the corner. B The number of straight line segments used to make up the corner radius.

6 -30 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en B A Botton: Typical Laserfont Top:Typical TrueType font B A The Textuses adiffereobject are speciallyfonts designed fontsthatare TrueTypeoutline fontsare fontsandare inst numbers. Textand cr can beeither objects Textcollection ofalphanumeric ch Objectsa are TEXT OBJECTS Barcode objects • •TextWinLaseobject LANhastwot Objects TEXT AND BAR CODE OBJECTS CODE BAR TEXT AND Icon representingobject based text aLaserfont Icon representing aTrueTypeobject fontbased text nt icon for each font type foreachfont nt icon ypes that representstrings: ypes installed in the inthe WinLaseinstalled LANfontlibrary. eated fromTrueTypefonts. Laseror fonts alled intheWindowsLaser operatingsystem. aracters that represent words, sentences, words, sentences, represent that aracters WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -31 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

To modify Horizontal and Vertical Text String settings 1 Click on the Text object to be modified. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the String tab. The String page displays the Text object string values.

E F G H

C D

The Horizontal and Vertical Text Object String page A The currently selected font. There are two types of fonts: • TrueType fonts • Laser fonts B The string value of the object C Change the text flow to: • Horizontal (default) - Text is marked along the horizontal axis. • Vertical - Text characters are placed vertically, each one under the previous • Radial Variable - Text is arranged in a circular fashion, and can be scaled independently in the x and y axes. • Radial fixed - Text is arranged in a circular fashion, and the object is displayed with three dotted line circles. The inner circle represents the maximum descent, the middle circle represents the circumference of the text itself, and the outer circle represents the maximum text height. • Circumferential - Text can be marked around the outside diameter of cylindrical parts by using a rotary motion system. D Change the spacing between characters

6 -32 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Paragraph TextStringsettingsTo modify 3 2 1 A J I H G A The TextObject paragraph property page: F E Click on the String the Click on tab. String The page Text the displays values. string object “Properties...”. select clickand mouse Right modified. be to text the Click on Use thisWindowsspeci insert to tool Use the justifybuttonstocontrol the True a of Italicsattribute the Change Type object text Changethe Bold attribute ofaTrue Typetext object. the editbox. currentfield isdisabled. this a singleline, text is number.negative ofzeroA value Tospace lines further apart,positivea enter num This lines. between the spacing Change characters independent oftheheight selected inth is - fixed Radial Enabled onlywhen uses the default line spacingbuilt line uses thedefault alignment of oftext. lines multiple al characters into the string editbox. into the al characters field is onlyenabled if there is ber. To linesclosertogether, space entera e String orientation box. Change the width of the of width the Change box. Stringe orientation WinLaseUser Guide LAN into the font. Note that if the if into thefont.Notethat more than one line of text in in text of more line one than JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -33 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

To modify Radial Text String settings 1 Click on the text object to be modified. 2 Right mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the String tab. The String page displays the Text object string values.

The Text Object radial property page A Select from the following: • CW fit • CCW fit

To modify Circumferential Text String settings with Intelligent Motion

NOTE • This function is available only if a compatible motion controller is detected by WinLase LAN and an appropriate motion configuration has been created

1 Click on the text object to be modified.

2 Right mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the String tab. The String page displays the Text object string values.

6 -34 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 5 4 D C B A F E D C B A The Textproperty Motion Object page Click the Motion tab. settings. page Motion motion Click the the Motion The displays Motion. called window in theProperty String the AnewtabFrom orientation list,select “Circumferential”. down drop appears G The deceleration rate when th reach will velocity themotor The maximum during amove. string. Reverses therotation direction of the motor when The radius ofthecylindricalmarked. part tobe The acceleration rate ofthemo Initial velocity ofthe motor. character is marked. This delay delay This marked. character is Changethe delay between when the motor hassteppedtoits the when e motor iscomingtoastop. e motor tor whenchangingvelocity. allows settling time forthemotor. indexing between individual characters in thetext final position and whenthe next WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities G E F

6 -35 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

BARCODE OBJECTS Barcode Objects represent numeric and/or alpha characters as machine-readable images. WinLase LAN Barcode Objects are offered in several different symbologies, including:

• Code 39, Extended Code 39, HIBC • CodaBar • Code 93 • Code 128, EAN/UCC 128 • Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) • POSTNET (Zip+4, Zip+6) •UPC A, UPC E • EAN 8, EAN 13, BookLan • Data Matrix (ECC200) • Denso QR code • PDF417

6 -36 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en BarcodeTo modify Stringsettings 3 2 1 G F E D C B A C B A BarcodeStringThe Object propertypage Click on the String the Click on tab. String values. The string Object page Barcode the displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object Barcode the Click on F E D The font used to display The font barcode. Thisoption isnotavailable inStand-Alone mode. position atext Select thisoptiontoautomatically characters areon what rules barcodefor each allowed type. to stringThe character Refer datafortheobject. The height of the text string as a percentageatext stringastheofThe height ofthebarcode height. The directionstringthe text isdrawn and marked. Right • •Left•Top Bottom • Wherepositioned relativeis thestring tothebarcode: and mark the text string.and markthetext the barcode the follow forthe sectionsthat specific string, which representsstring, content ofthe thestring WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -37 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

G The distance from the closest part of the text to the edge of the barcode, as a percentage of the barcode height.

Left: Human Readable Text String position Bottom, Orientation 0 Middle: Human Readable Text String position Top, Orientation 180 Right: Human Readable Text String position Right, Orientation 90

6 -38 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Code 39 settings 3 2 1 H G F E D C B A A The Code39 tunerproperty page them in the string. WinLase LAN automatically adds thestart andst and The Asteriskisreservedforthispurpose is single string.code Eachbar 39is avariableCode lengthsymbology thatca Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object 39 Code the Click on B 1234567890ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ-.*$/+% • Normalis avariable Code39 length symbol refer formorespecifications totheCode39 details. restthe of meanings characters tochangethe ofth (including asterisks).fu ASCII characterset The modificatio a is Full ASCII case inWinLase LAN. characters, WinLase them to will convert LAN n of the Normal (standard)the 128 of thecomplete n can encode that version framed by a start/stop character character bya framed start/stop ogy thecanencodethe following 44 characters: may not beusedinthe body of the message. ll set ofcharactersusestheconceptshift ll n encode amaximum100characters ina n of upper case, even thou even case, upper e intheNormal characters Code 39 set. Please op codetoeachbarcode, sodonot include . If the string contains lower case represented byanasterisk(*). WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES gh theyappearaslower Mark Entities

6 -39 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

C HIBC, or “Health Industry Bar Code” is a specification for a standard method of encoding data using Code 39 in health care applications. When using this option, WinLase LAN automatically adds a plus character (+) as the first character, and also calculates and adds a Modulo 43 check digit. D The Bar Width Reduction parameter allows setting of a reduction or gain (-99 to 99%) in the width of all the solid bars in a barcode, as a percentage of the Narrow bar width. E Code 39 symbologies consist of bars and spaces with only two element widths, Narrow and Wide, where the width of the wide elements is a fixed multiple of the width of the narrow elements. The specifications for Code 39 allow a Narrow to Wide Ratio of 20% to 30% (2.0 to 3.0). F Code 39 allows for an optional (modulo 43) check. When this option is enabled, WinLase LAN will automatically calculate and append the proper check character to the symbol. G Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. H The size of the quiet zone as a percentage of the barcode size

6 -40 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify CodaBar settings 3 2 1 D C B A A The CodaBar tunerproperty page upper case,eventhough letters If lowercase characters. th D andor message mustbeABC CodaBar and stopchar as startD only and characters ABC A maximum of 100 characters can beenco 0123456789-$:/.+ABCD • characters: CodaBaris avariable lengthsymbologyth Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object CodaBar the Click on of all the solid barsof all thesolidbarcode, ina asapercentageNarrow ofthe bar width. The Bar WidthReduction parameter allows settingofareduction orgain (-99width to99%) inthe lower case is displayed inWinLase LAN. are used for A B C or D,WinLase LANwillconvertthemto at allowsencodingtheof following20 ded in a single string. CodaBar uses the CodaBar ded inasinglestring. e bodyofthemessages acters. Thus, the first and last digits ofa acters. Thus,thefirstandlast WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES hould not contain thesehould not Mark Entities

6 -41 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

B CodaBar symbologies consist of bars and spaces with only two element widths, Narrow and Wide, where the width of the wide elements is a fixed multiple of the width of the narrow elements. The specifications for CodaBar allow a Narrow to Wide Ratio of 20% to 30% (2.0 to 3.0). C Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. D The size of the quiet zone as a percentage of the barcode size

6 -42 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Code 93 settings 3 2 1 C B A value. C B A The Code93 tunerproperty page they so digits, check the as well as characters special start/stop character. WinLase LAN will automatically add the start and stop digits asanadded two check of 100characters maximum set. A 93is avariableCode lengthsymbology that Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to object barcode appropriate the Click on The size of the quiet zone as a percentageThe sizeofthequietzone asa ofthebarcode size Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. barsof all thesolidbarcode, ina asapercentageNarrow ofthe bar width. The Bar WidthReduction parameter allows settingofareduction orgain (-99width to99%) inthe measure ofsecurity,and the can be encoded inasinglestring.Code93 incorporates can encode thecomplete can should notbeincluded barcode isalsoframed by a WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES as part of the string part ofthe as 128 ASCII character Mark Entities

6 -43 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

To modify POSTNET settings POSTNET (POSTal Numeric Encoding Technique) is a 5, 9 or 11 digit numeric only bar code symbology. The bar code may represent a five digit ZIP code (32 bars), a nine digit ZIP + 4 code (52 bars) or an eleven digit Delivery Point code (62 bars). WinLase LAN will ignore non-numeric data in the bar code string when creating the bar code image, even though the non-numeric data is displayed in WinLase LAN.

1 Click on the appropriate barcode object to be modified. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the Tuner tab. The Tuner page displays the Barcode Object tuner values.

A B C

The POSTNET tuner property page A The Bar Width Reduction parameter allows setting of a reduction or gain (-99 to 99%) in the width of all the solid bars in a barcode, as a percentage of the Narrow bar width. B Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. C The size of the quiet zone as a percentage of the barcode size

6 -44 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en UPC settings To modify 3 2 1 C B A A The UPCtunerproperty page 123456,12 append ittothe main number, witha comm side of the right added onto supplemental is tothe mainbarcode symbol.The Both UPC-A and UPC-Eallowforasupplementa and calculates automatically a UPC-Asymbol.In a12 digit string, the will beremoved.Ifth digit 7th contains 6 or 7 digits, WinLas specifyingthe string UPC-AorUPC-E may codes, are numericonlysymbologies and UPC-E UPC-A Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to object barcode appropriate the Click on of all the solid barsof all thesolidbarcode, ina asapercentageNarrow ofthe bar width. The Bar WidthReduction parameter allows settingofareduction orgain (-99width to99%) inthe a standard UPC symbol.Tostandard a include asupplementalnumber, appends a checkdigitwhen e LAN will generate a UPC-E sy will generateaUPC-E LAN e e string contains 11e string or12digi 12th digitwill be re a separating it from the main numberasin: from the separating it a simply asmalladditionalbar code thatis l twoor fivedigit used inretail applications. When contain 6,7,11 or12 digits.Ifthestring creating the barcodeimage. creating ts, WinLasets, LAN moved. WinLaseLAN WinLaseUser Guide LAN mbol. In a 7 digita string,mbol. In the JOB ENTITIES number tobeappended Mark Entities will generate

6 -45 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

B Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. C The size of the quiet zone as a percentage of the barcode size

6 -46 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Code 128 settings 3 2 1 J I H G F E D C B A C B A The Code128 tuner property page 128 specificationformore details. allows encodingoffourspecialfunction code three different character sets is employed. In pattern canhaveoneofth each patterns, and maximum of 100 characters inasingle stri length, highdensit is avariable 128 Code Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. tobe Object 128 Code the Click on will also be calculated will automatically.also becalculated resultingshift codessothatthe and character co bar WinLaseproper the select willautomatically LAN FNC2FNC4, - and usesFNC-1partas ofthestartcodein symbol. basedCode128 on but has adouble startcharacter. EAN/UCC 128 (E EAN/UCC 128 - FNC4 codes(FNC1 Supports thespecialfunction uropäische A rtikel N rtikel ummerierung) is a special form of the Code 128. EAN 128 is y, alphanumeric symbology, andcan encode a ng.128 has106diff Code addition toASCIIcharacters,128also Code ree differentdepending onwhichmeanings, of s (FNC1 - FNC4). Please refer to the Code Please refertothe FNC4). - s (FNC1 character sets and insert the necessary start insert the character setsand ). Please refer Please ). toth Also thecodesupport doesnot function codes de de will be as short as possible.The check digit WinLaseUser Guide LAN e Code 128specification. e Code JOB ENTITIES erent barand space Mark Entities

6 -47 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

D Use character subset A which includes the standard ASCII symbols, digits, upper case letters, and control codes. E Use character subset B which includes standard ASCII symbols, digits, upper and lower case letters. F Use character subset C which compresses two numeric digits into each character, providing excellent density. G The Bar Width Reduction parameter allows setting of a reduction or gain (-99 to 99%) in the width of all the solid bars in a barcode, as a percentage of the Narrow bar width. H Some applications for EAN/UCC 128 require an additional Mod 10 check digit, which can be enabled by selecting this option. I Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. J The size of the quiet zone as a percentage of the barcode size

6 -48 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en InterleavedTo modify 5 settings 2of 3 2 1 E D C B A B A The Interleaved 2of5tuner property page LAN doesnotdisplayth string, WinLase LANwillLeft-P must consist ofanevenstrings numberofdig in thespaces. even positiondigitsareencoded interleaved an digit pairsin 5 isahighdensity variable Interleaved 2of Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to 5Object 2of the Click on (2.0 to 3.0). to (2.0 forInterleaved2of The specifications elements. and Wide, where thewidthofwideelements Interleaved 2of5symbologiesbars consistof an barsof all thesolidbarcode, ina asapercentageNarrow ofthe bar width. The Bar WidthReduction parameter allows settingofareduction orgain (-99width to99%) inthe e Left-Paddeddigit. manner.and the the bars, are encodedin digits odd position The ad one zero tothe string entered,eventhough WinLase length numeric only symbology that encodes that only symbology lengthnumeric its. If an odd number of digits isenteredforthe ofits. Ifanoddnumber is a fixed multiple of the width ofthenarrowthe of is afixedmultiple 5 allow a Narrowa 5 allow toWide Because ofthis,Interleaved25barcodes d spacesonlywith two elementwidths, Narrow WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Ratioof20% to 30% Mark Entities

6 -49 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

C Interleaved 2 of 5 optionally allows for a weighted modulo 10 check character for special situations where data security is important. When this option is selected, WinLase LAN will automatically calculate and append the proper check character to the symbol. D Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. E The size of the quiet zone as a percentage of the barcode size

6 -50 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en EAN settings To modify 3 2 1 E D C B A WinLasegenera LANwill digi 8 digitstring,8th an the digits. If the string contains 7 or 8 digits, codes. When specifying EAN-8 the barcode image. removed.WinLase LANautomatically calculat version of UPC.Ituses the The EAN tunerThe EAN property page be appendedtothemainbarc Like UPC, both EAN-8 and EAN-13 allow for a EAN or code that is addedontothecode thatrightof a side in: 123456,12 number, appendittothemainnumber, with a Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object EAN the Click on E uropean A rticle rticle N te a UPC-13 symbol. In a 13 digit UPC-13 symbol.Ina13 a te same size requirements andasi umbering system (als umbering system t will be removed. If the stri the If removed. be will t ode symbol.The supplementalis or EAN-13 codes,the string WinLase LANgenerate will standard EANsymbol.To includeasupplemental comma separating it from the main number as es and appends a checkdigitwhenes andappends creating supplemental two or fi o called JAN in Japan) is aEuropeano calledJANinJapan) ng contains 12 or 13digits, contains 12 ng milar encodingscheme UPC as may contain 7,8, 12 or 13 string, the 13th simply asmalladditionalbar WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES anEAN-8symbol.In ve digitnumberto Mark Entities digit will be digit will

6 -51 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

A Encodes a standard EAN symbol. B Encodes a BookLAN symbol, which is an EAN-13 symbol consisting of the first 9 digits of a ISBN number preceded by the digits 978 and terminated with a standard EAN check digit. Please refer to the BookLAN specification. C The Bar Width Reduction parameter allows setting of a reduction or gain (-99 to 99%) in the width of all the solid bars in a barcode, as a percentage of the Narrow bar width. D Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. E The size of the quiet zone as a percentage of the barcode size

6 -52 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en DataTo modifysettings Matrix 3 2 1 G F E D C B A B A property tuner The DataMatrix page code symbol. the bar perimeter of is built onasquare(oroptiona encode up to3000 characters from the enti high densit a Data Matrixis Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse theDataClick on modified. MatrixObjecttobe • ECC 140 - Provides error correction for damage of up to 25% of the marked symbol marked the - Provides of 25% 140 to error ECC up of correctiondamage for • ECC- 100 Provides error correctiondamageforofup to12.6% ofthe markedsymbol • symbol marked the of - Provides 5.5% 080 to errorup ECC of correctiondamage for • symbol marked the of - Provides 2.8% 050 to errorup ECC of correctiondamage for • - Provides ECC 000 noerrorcorrection • Select from thefollowingECC (E selections will generate rectangular grids. resultingSelect the shape ofthesymbol. Automa y 2 dimensional matrix styl lly rectangular) grid rror C hecking and C re 256 byte ASCII character set. The symbology ASCII characterset. re 256byte tic will asquaretic will generate grid, and theother arranged with afinderpattern around the orrection) options: e barcode symbology thatcan WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -53 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

• ECC 200 - The latest and most advanced version of Data Matrix, which employs a Reed- Solomon error correction algorithm along with a code set switching mechanism that is much more efficient at packing data into the symbol. This option supports all C When specifying ECC 000 - ECC 140, select from the following Data formats, which defines the type of data that may be encoded in the symbol: • 1 - Numeric digits 0 to 9 and the space character • 2 - Upper case alpha A-Z and the space character • 3 - Upper case alphanumeric A-Z, 0-9 and the space character • 4 - A-Z, 0-9, space, minus, period, comma and forward slash • 5 - 7 bit ASCII - all ASCII characters between ASCII 0 to ASCII 127 • 6 - 8 bit ASCII - all ASCII characters between ASCII 0 to ASCII 255 D Adjust the size of each individual cell as a percentage of the normal size cell E When this option is selected, then the tilde character (~) can be used in the string as an indicator that the character(s) following the tilde are to be interpreted with a special meaning. An example is when encoding UID codes. If this option is not selected, then the string is assumed to not contain any special function codes. For most applications, this option would be used. F Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. G The size of the quiet zone which surrounds the symbol as the number of cells.

6 -54 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en QR CodesettingsTo modify 3 2 1 E D C B A square pattern and can encode and can square pattern The QRCodetuner property page Kanji(Shift JISvalues8140h characters • 8-bit byte data(JIS 8-bit ch • Alphanumeric data (0 to9, Uppercase Ato • 9) to Numeric data(0 • isQR code atwo-dimensional matrixsymbol Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object QRCode the Click on JIS X0208) &%*+-./: the following 4 character sets: the following4character aracter set (Latin and Kana) in accordance with JISX0201) with and inaccordance Kana) (Latin set aracter to 9FFCh and E040h to EAA4h shifted from shifted E040h toEAA4h to 9FFChand which consists of squa which consists Z,andnine specia WinLaseUser Guide LAN l characters --space,l JOB ENTITIES re cellsarranged in a Mark Entities

6 -55 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

A Select from the following models:

Max Max Alpha- Size numeric numeric Max Kanji Model (cells) characters characters characters Model 1 21 x 21 to 1167 707 299 73 x 73 Model 2 21 x 21 to 3000 3000 1817 177 x 177 MicroQR 11 x 11 to 35 21 9 17 x 17

B Select the Reed-Solomon error correction level from the following: •L (7%) •M (15%) •Q (25%) •H (30%) C Adjust the size of each individual cell as a percentage of the normal size cell D Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. E The size of the quiet zone which surrounds the symbol as the number of cells.

6 -56 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en PDF417To modify settings 3 2 1 J I H G F E D C B A ASCII character set. A maximumof 2710 char stacked set of smaller bar codes.The sym A The PDFtuner 417 property page PDF417is ahighc density 2dimensionalbar Click on the Tuner the Click on tab. Tuner The values. tuner page Object Barcode the displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse bemodified. to Object PDF417 the Click on Numeric mode only - Supports encoding only the numeric characters 0 - 9 and can achieve data • Binary mode- only Supports encoding en the • EXC mode- only Extended Alphanumeric Comp • Auto/EXC/Bin - This mode similaris toAuto • Auto/EXC/Bin/Num- Thismode switching allowsfull betweenthethree standarddata • Select from thefollo compression ofapproximately approximately 1.2 characters percodeword. printable ASCII characters and can compress to Numeric mode. compaction modes and providesmaximum the data compression possible wing Compaction modes: 3 characters percode word. bology iscapableof encoding the entire 255 ode symbology thatessent /EXC/Bin/Num except it does not allow switching does not it except /EXC/Bin/Num acters can beencoded in a single string. tire ASCII character set,and cancompress approximately 2characters percode word. action, whichsupports theencoding ofall WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES ially consists of a Mark Entities

6 -57 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

B Select from the following Security levels:

Security Maximum Limit of Allowable Symbol Overhead (Number Level Erasures + (2 x Misdecodes) of Additional Code words) 00 2 12 4 26 8 314 16 430 32 562 64 6 126 128 7 254 256 8 510 512

C If the Security Level is set to Automatic, the Error Correction overhead can be specified from 0 to 99%. D The default maximum number of row and columns allowed in a PDF symbol is 30 rows and 90 columns. If smaller values for these parameters are specified, an upper limit is defined for the overall height or width of the generated symbol. E The default maximum number of row and columns allowed in a PDF symbol is 30 rows and 90 columns. If smaller values for these parameters are specified, an upper limit is defined for the overall height or width of the generated symbol. F Defines the overall shape of the symbol G The Bar Width Reduction parameter allows setting of a reduction or gain (-99 to 99%) in the width of all the solid bars in a barcode, as a percentage of the Narrow bar width. H Select this option to generate a Truncated PDF417 symbol. A truncated symbol is almost identical to a standard PDF417 symbol except that the right row indicator code words and the right hand stop pattern are omitted and replaced with a narrow bar one module wide. I Inverts the dark and light bars, and adds a quiet zone around the barcode. J The size of the quiet zone which surrounds the symbol as the number of cells.

6 -58 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Objectthejustification of To controlthe • string can be accomplished in beaccomplished can string justification desired. justification the to corresponding button radio tab, appropriate Source the the From select can be configuredrun time it after rendering justifies The wayanobject NOTE Configure the job so stringscan be cha • complex combinationscomponents Configure usingthe ofstring • Automatically retrieve the current time/date settings from the operating system for the • Configuring the object toretrievethe next te • Reading consecutive strings • Configuring the object to • Configuring the object toprompt the machin • content ofbarcode string One ofthe most powerful features of WinLase STRINGS) TIME(DYNAMIC AT RUN STRING THE CHANGING buffer using the available inStand-Alone mode. Supply String AutoDate Source option. Controlled from Remote API option feature • • Source options.Notavaila Dynamic Text Fonts. See Dynamic Text information. new Laserfonttoan For additional symbology support, Get string from memorybuffer This feature is for single line text or barcodes only. orbarcodes text line for single is feature This andtextobjects whilethe job using the Justify settings. automatically serialize anumber of different ways: “Creating anewLaser font” on page Source option from atextfile using the only supports Barcode types: supports Barcode only is onlypossible inStand-Alone mode whenusingLaser LEC-1device”onpage nged whileinStand-Alone mode using the ble inStand-Alone mode. s images withstringnew the itreceives during LAN isthe ability to st string to mark from an internal memory memory tomark st from aninternal string e operator to enter a new string using the string using new a e operatortoenter Source option. Source

it’s text string using the please consult thefactory. please process is running.Changingthe process TextMerge Data Matrix, Code 128. WinLaseUser Guide LAN

-40

5 JOB ENTITIES dynamically changethe Source option. Not Custom String

-38 formore and Mark Entities Serialize “Adding a Source

6 -59 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

Controlling how the User Interface updates when strings are dynamically changed During the execution of a job than contains Dynamic Strings, the object can be configured to display the previous string, or the next string to be marked in the WinLase LAN workspace. For example, if using the TextMerge function, what the next string to mark will be, before marking the part. In this case, the screen is displaying the next string. In other situations, it may be desirable to compare the string displayed on the screen after the mark is complete. In this case the screen would display the previous string.

• To see the next string on-screen, from the Source tab, select “Update String before mark” • To see the previous string on-screen, deselect “Update String before mark”

• To refresh the screen while the Run dialog is open, it may be necessary to click the Refresh button.

6 -60 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the Text Merge option 4 3 2 1 D C B A string must be separated by a carria a must beseparatedby string NOTE section. group andthe Start linevalues.A detailed desc are available. Multi-line text must also have acarriage return as well. Singl Job isrunning. A text merge file large listsofstringvalues,such lines from thetextfile, and mark thebarcode string from the text file. At runtime, the object will automatically extract the correct line or file,the de link toatext andselect Create or appear. “UseTextMerge”.list, select down String the rulesdrop From TextMerge The settings tab. Source the Click on values. page Source Source The the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object string the Click on

Not available inStand-Alone mode • mergepossibmade operationis asnames, etc. tobe “merged” withthe text object while the is asimpletext file, with a ge return (Enterkey). The last E sired justification tousewhenmerging thenext on the part. TextMerge is afeature that allows e lines, as wellas multi-line merge operations ription ofthese featuresfollowing isinthe F .txt extension.Eachcontiguous le by using the # objectsin le byusingthe WinLaseUser Guide LAN lineof the textmerge file JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -61 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

The TextMerge property page A The text file to link to at run time. The text file is read once when the Job is first started, and then written to at the end of a Job to save the current text file line location. B Create and save a text merge file with this button C Change the number of objects in a multi-line merge group. An example of a multi-line merge group is a Name and Company Name. The Job would consist of two text objects, positioned appropriately, each using the same MergeFile. Both objects would have the # objects in group set to 2. The first object to mark would have the Start line value set to 1, and the second object to mark would have the Start line value set to 2. D Change the starting line in a multi-line merge group. An example of a multi-line merge group is a Name and Company Name. The Job would consist of two text objects, positioned appropriately, each using the same MergeFile. Both objects would have the # objects in group set to 2. The first object to mark would have the Start line value set to 1, and the second object to mark would have the Start line value set to 2. E Edit an existing text file with this button. F Locate and insert a text merge file with this button.

6 -62 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the AutoDate option 4 3 2 1 A A The AutoDate execution. Windowsfrom the retrieved systemclockinto selected, and the date format selected. AutoDate automatically inserts a time related string The calendar date,time,code or shiftbe will automatically inserted,usingthe justification appear. settings AutoDate The AutoDate”. “Use list, select down String the rulesdrop From tab. Source the Click on values. page Source Source The the displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object string the Click on original object can be original object • YWW - Object will printwill abarcode Object YWW - representa • DDMonth,YYYY- will Object print abarc • barca willprint - Object YYYY DD Month • print abarcode will Object - DD/MM/YY representation of:15/01/09 • print abarcode will Object - MM/DD/YY representation of:01/15/09 • willprintaba Object - YYMMDD • Using the date January 15, 2009 as an exa property page regarded asaplaceholder for the rcode representation 090115 of: mple, the available Au available the mple, ode representation of: 15 January2009 ode representation of: January 15 2009 the objects string vastring theobjects tion of: 902, wheretion of: number.is theweek WW date tobe inserted during Job toDate formats are: formats toDate WinLaseUser Guide LAN lueThe atruntime. JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -63 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

• YMD - Object will print a barcode representation of: 912 • JJJ - Object will print a barcode representation of: 015, where JJJ is the three-digit day of the year. • JJJY - Object will print a barcode representation of: 0159, where JJJ is the three-digit day of the year, and Y is the single digit year. • YY - String will print 09. • Shift code - String will print a custom value depending on the settings chosen. Details on using the shift code feature are in the next section. • DMY - String will print 15019. • HH:MM:SS - String will print the current system time.

6 -64 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the AutoDate > Shift Code option 5 4 3 2 1 B A A The Shift codeproperty page From the Format drop down list, select Shift list, shift appear. The down Code. settings drop code Format the From AutoDate”. “Use list, select down String the rulesdrop From tab. Source the Click on values. page Source Source The the displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object string the Click on B D C Changes thestarttime at which this is valid is used, andtherestis validused, ar multiple Enables ordisables shift Ifmultipl codes. Changes thecharacter st wherestop time the Changes thispartic enabled shifts,a“?”isreturned. ring tomarkif this e ignored.e there If arethat times particular shiftcodeis valid. ular shift codeis shift code isvalid. shiftcode e shifts have overlapping times, thefirst e shiftshaveoverlapping shift times, that no longer valid. no longer C areany ofthe within notspecified WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities D

6 -65 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

To configure the Supply String at Start option Before the Job is run, the operator is prompted to enter a text string, which will be used throughout the running of the Job. The next string value will use the selected justification. The Supply string at start feature will prompt the operator to supply a new string value just after the Job > Run button is clicked. This new value is then used until the process is stopped.

NOTE • Not available in Stand-Alone mode

1 Click on the string Object to be modified.

2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the Source tab. The Source page displays the Source values.

4 From the String rules drop down list, select “Supply string at start”. The Supply string at start settings appear.

To configure the Supply String Every Mark option Prompts the operator to supply a text string before each mark is executed, using the selected justification. Short production runs are typical of this example. For larger volumes, the TextMerge feature should be used. The Supply string every mark feature will prompt the operator to supply a new string value just before the object is scheduled to mark.

NOTE • Not available in Stand-Alone mode

1 Click on the string Object to be modified.

2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the Source tab. The Source page displays the Source values. 4 From the String rules drop down list, select “Supply string every mark”. The Supply string every mark settings appear.

6 -66 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the Serialize options 4 3 2 1 B A D C justification. The incremenjustification. The The Serialize property page a serialization sequence, string valuethatwassa this feature. When the Job starts, the first va incrementing. To automatically increment or decrement a Barcode Objects string value, use value batch and the mark, each incremented Usesthe currentstring valuethe as start of “Serialize with supplied start value”. The Serialize settings appear. settings startSerialize The supplied with value”. “Serialize list, select down String the rulesdrop From tab. Source the Click on values. page Source Source The the displays select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object string the Click on serialization sequence StartValue, be pr except theoperatorwill Current with Serialize as same the is feature This incrementing. before wait to many cycles the alpha numericstring valueincremented is each mark, andthe batch value controls how ved withtheJob.Prompts opera using the selected justification. selected usingthe t controls the amount the al amount t controlsthe ompted to supply the starting valueofthe ompted tosupplythe a serialization sequence, lue markedbythe object willcurrent bethe controls how many cycl “Serialize with current start current with or “Serialize value” pha numeric string valueis pha numeric The increment controls the amount controls Theincrement tor tosupplythestartingvalueof WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES using the selected selected the using es to wait before before wait to es

Mark Entities

6 -67 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

A There are two options available for serialization: • Serialize with current start value - This option will start serializing with the value that the text object had when the job was saved. To save the current value of the text object to the job automatically when the job is running, see “To continuously save Dynamic string changes” on page 7 -13. • Serialize with supplied start value - When the job is run, the operator is prompted to enter the starting serial number. See “To respond to the Enter Character String dialog box” on page 7 -19 for more details. B Changes the serialization increment value. Serialization is alpha as well as numeric; 0001A will increment to 0001B. Note that alpha serialization is only valid on ANSI text. Unicode alpha text may not increment correctly. Leading zeros are retained in the string if the format of the object allows it, otherwise they are removed. C When a number greater than one is placed in the batch field, the object will not increment until “batch” mark cycles have taken place. On the next mark, the object will increment by “increment”. D Select this option to automatically reset the serial number based on specified conditions.

6 -68 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To automatically reset the serial number • B A B A B A Select the “Automatically reset serial number” option. serial number” reset the “Automatically Select B A B A B A Reset whenthreshold isreached Reset when specific I/O port isHIGH I/O Reset whenspecific Reset when specific time is reachedtime is Reset whenspecific The value at which the se the The valueatwhich leading zeros. When the threshold is reached, the serial number The input port tocheckbeforeThe inputport If theobject. marking zeros. When the I/O port is set, the serial number is re theserialnumber port isset, I/O the When serial number will reset. Before theobjectis marked, th leading zeros. When the timeis specified reached, theserial number rial number is reset. is number rial e time is checked, and if the PC tim PC the andif ischecked, e time set to this value. The re set tothisvalue.The is resetis tothisvalue. the port is set, the serial number isreset.serial the is set, theport is resetvalue. this to e is afterthespecified time, the WinLaseUser Guide LAN The reset valuecanhave set value can have leading set valuecanhave JOB ENTITIES The reset valuecanhave Mark Entities

6 -69 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

To configure the Get String from Memory Buffer option During runtime, the string object will retrieve the string content to mark from an internal memory buffer. There are 10 buffers available, and these buffers can be filled with string values from outside equipment. The maximum string length for each buffer is 3000 characters. To change a string objects string from an external program while the Job is running, use this feature. Just before the object is scheduled to mark, the string will be retrieved from the selected memory buffer. An external program can simply set any of the ten available memory buffers with a string value, and does not need to know about the internal structure of a particular Job file

1 Click on the string Object to be modified. Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. 2 Click on the Source tab. The Source page displays the Source values.

3 From the String rules drop down list, select “Get String from memory buffer”. The memory buffer settings appear.

A B

The Memory Buffer property page A Changes an index value from 1 to 10, corresponding the 10 memory buffers available. B Displays the current contents of the internal memory buffer. The buffers are initialized with a '?' when the application starts. To refresh the display, change the buffer index to another value, and then back to the desired index.

6 -70 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Using theCustomString feature 4 3 2 1 A A The CustomString propertypage. object. the with saved instructions specifier format the using assembled be will string the mark, markingis running,usethisfeat Jobwhile the available formatspecifiers. To changestringaobjects string toacustomizedmark string specifier stri Using aformat memory buffer settings appear. settings buffer memory The buffer”. String memory “Get from list, select down String the rulesdrop From tab. Source the Click on values. page Source Source The the displays select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. be to Object string the Click on list ofavailablespecifiers. string Customize the mark using this specifierstri ng, you can build a customized mark string from a list of a from mark stringbuild acustomizedng, youcan ure. Just before the object isscheduled to ng. See ng. See the followingFormat Specifier Table fora WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -71 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

Specifier Example Data inserted into string %A Abbreviated Weekday (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun) %B Abbreviated Month (Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec) %C Date and Time (MM/DD/YY HH:MM) %D Day of the Month (01 - 31) %d,’ ’,’ ’ See Note E Map a string to a Day of the month (See Note E) %E Inserts current string value of object %e,i %e,1 Inserts a string from another object, where i = zero-based object index %F,i,’f’ %F,0,’c:\test.txt’ Insert string from text file, i = zero based string index, f = fully qualified filename %G,’ ’,’ ’ See Note A Map a string to an Hour of the day (See Note A) %H Hour of the Day (00 - 23) %h Hour of the Day (00 - 12) %I,p,j,’s’ %I,2,0,’Lanmark’ Insert string, p = position, j = justification, s = string to insert (See Note F) %i,p,v %i,0,1 Inserts a string from another object, where p= zero-based object index, and numerically adds the value v to the string (See Note G) %J Julian Day of the Year (001 - 366) %K Month Code (1 - 9, O, N, D) %L Last Digit of the Year (0 - 9) %M Month (01 - 12) %m,’ ‘,’ ‘ See Note D Map a string to a Month (See Note D) %N Minutes of the Hour (00 - 59) %n Seconds of the Hour (00 - 59) %O Serial Number, increments by 1, starts with value 1 at start of process %P AM or PM %Q# %Q1 Inserts string from memory buffer # (1-10) %R Week Number (01 - 53) [week 01 is week containing January 1] %S,m,s,i,b %S,0,1,1,1 Serial number, m = maximum value, s = start value, i = increment, b = batch (See Note B) %T Time (HH:MM) %U,b,e,’s ‘ %U,12:00,14:00,’Shift 1’ Shift code, b = begin time, e = end time, s = string to insert (See Note C) %V’s‘ %V’Lanmark’ Insert text string, s = string to insert %W Weekday (where: 1 = Sunday… 7 = Saturday) %w Weekday (where: 1 = Monday… 7 = Sunday) %X# %X5 Insert number of spaces in string %Y Year (00 - 99)

6 -72 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Resulting marked string:24 02 09 PART#: 100 Format SpecifierString:%D%X1%M%X1%Y%X1%V'PART#:100' Example markedon February 24, 2009: F E D C B A Notes G position and justification variable. position andjustificationvariable. string into a isusedtoinsert specifier The %I on. after thespecifier, andeachpositioncorresponds to to value map astring used to is The %dspecifier so on. will beinserted,and example: %m,a,b,c,d,e positions afterthespecifier, and The %m specifier is used tomapa string valu 00:00. Toprogram acro ashiftthatgoes stringbetweenthesinglequotesw the time, end Time If format. mustbeinthe24hourtime values before string twotimes same Batch will allowskippingof an arecharacters will beincremenAlpha and allowed, number ofcharactersis thesame for both the st resetwill The nextmark If le start value. tothe st willmarkthe object The text 0) = at midnight(hour %G,a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x example: an is following format.The example, this In positions afterthespecifier, andea The %G specifier is used tomapa string value variable is defined as 0 = left justification, 1= justification, variable isdefinedas0=left indexis 1000, 0 specify and %i,0,3 we result the wouldbe 1003 must be numerical only (no alpha For chracters). and addtheto anintegervalue string using avaluevariable.obtained Thestring fromobject the from astring obtain to is used The %ispecifier %I,1,1,’Controls’ theresultLanmarkControls would be %I,3,0,’Controls’specify andwe is Lanmark, the the secondDayofmontha'2'w %d,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,Vexample: on thisexample, >In , an 'a' will be inserted, at 01:00, at01:00, , an'a'willbeinserted, ,f,g,h,i,j,k,l > In this example, inMa this example, >In ,f,g,h,i,j,k,l incrementing value. next tothe art value first, then incrementthen art valuefirst, un incrementif bat example, For event. each positioncorresponds toaMo ss 00:00(midnigh ch positioncorresponds toan Hour ill be inserted, on the fifteenth day onthefifteenth ill beinserted, The positionvariablestarts with e to the current Month. There are 12 mandatory a specific positioninthe specific a ading characters are characters ading requir right justification. For examp art value andmaxi to the Hour oftheday. Hour to the There are 24 mandatory another object usingazero-basedobject another variable, index ill be inserted, otherwise nothing will be inserted. otherwisenothingwillbe inserted, be ill the current Day. Therear the currentthe and the begin time isbetweenthe time resultLaControlsnmark. wouldbe wespecify If example, if the string obtained fromif the string example, at anobject t), use one shift to 23:59 and another shiftfromt), useoneshiftto23:59and a Day of the month valu aDayofthe ted based on the ASCII value ofthecharacter. value on theASCII ted based a 'b' will be inserted, and so on. a 'b'willbeinserted,and y an 'e' will be inserted, in October a'j' y an'e'willbeinserted, inOctober til it reachestil maximumvalue. the mum value (e.g. 0001 and 9999). WinLaseUser Guide LAN nth value. The following is an following is The nth value. ch = 2, the object will mark the the will mark theobject 2, ch = an index of1.Thejustification an index an 'F' will be inserted,andso be will an 'F' of the day value, in 24 hour in24 value, oftheday current string, usinga JOB ENTITIES e 31mandatory positions ed, make sureed, make thetotal le, ifthecurrentle, string e. The following is an following is e. The Mark Entities

6 -73 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

Changing text strings from an external controller in Stand-Alone mode There are a number of ways a Text object can be configured to change it’s text string automatically when in Stand-Alone mode:

• Serialization • AutoDate • Get string from Memory Buffer If the requirement is to send a new Text string from en external controller such as a PLC or another PC, the text object must be configured to allow this capability.

1 Click on the string Object to be modified.

2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. 3 Click on the Source tab. The Source page displays the Source values.

4 From the String rules drop down list, select “Controlled by Remote API”.

6 -74 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en LaserDot MatrixTo modify settings Font 3 2 1 Right:screen On display usingdisplay dot sizeof50bits Left: Onscreen disp of effects by the are that achieved over the number oftimes thelaser will fire at closely spaceddots, similar to standardvector-marking format. With DotMatr Dot Matrix Laser Fontsprovidefundamentally a different waytomark textfrom the DOT MATRIX LASER FONTS Click on the Settings tab. Settings page the TextClick on the Settings The displays values. settings object select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. tobe object style text matrix Dot the Click on lay usingdotlay display size of 200 bits a bitmapa object.Dot Matrix The Laser Fontoffers control adjustingthe dotmatrixparameters. each dot.Thefollowingimagesillustratesome ix LaserFonts, thete WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES xt iscomprisedof Mark Entities

6 -75 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

4 In the Mark Style drop-down, select Dot.

B C A D

The Dot Settings page A Changes the size of each individual dot as it is displayed in WinLase LAN. This value has no effect on the actual mark. If the dot size is set to the effective spot size of the laser on the material, correct dot spacing can be visualized on screen. B The length of time the laser is on during a single pulse. C The time the laser is off between successive pulses. D This setting controls the number of times the laser will fire at each dot within the array of dots that comprise a character. The laser is turned on using the settings of frequency and pulse width found on the Profiles page.

6 -76 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en LinearTo modifybar DotSetting code Values 3 2 1 Right:Matrix SectionofaData object w Left: Section ofaDa circle. ofeach and the diameter mode, the barcode is comprised illustratesome oftheeffects that are achievedadjusting by parameters.Dot the InCircle spacing,number andthe oftimes laser thewillat fire each dot.following Theimages similar toabitmap object. The Dotmodeba vector-markingformat. InDo fundamentallyDot mode differena provides CIRCLES OR WITHDOTS BARCODES FILLING Click on the Settings tab. Settings page the TextClick on the Settings The displays values. settings object select“Properties...”. and click Right-mouse bemodified. to object barcode linear the Click on object offers additionalcontrol ta Matrixobjectwith4rows t mode,barcode thecompri is over circledotspacing, the nu of closely spaced circles. circles. spaced of closely ith 2rows / columns,circle diameter 150 rcode object offersrcode object add / columns, dot display size30 / columns, dot t way to mark barcodes from the standard The Circle Dot modebarcode sed ofcloselyspaceddots, mber of sidesoneachcircle, mber WinLaseUser Guide LAN itional control overdot itional JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities

6 -77 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

4 In the Mark Style drop-down, select Dot.

A C D B E F

The Dot Settings page A Control the spacing between adjacent dots. B Changes to the size of the dot on screen have no effect on the mark. C The length of time the laser is on during a single pulse. D The time the laser is off between successive pulses. E This setting controls the number of times the laser will fire at each dot within the array of dots that comprise a character. The laser is turned on using the settings of frequency and pulse width found on the Profiles page. F Display and mark the rectangular outline that represents each individual bar.

6 -78 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify 2D bar code Dot settings 4 3 2 1 C B A C B A The DotsSettingspage In the Mark Style drop-down, select “Dots”. select MarkStyleIn the drop-down, tab. Settings page the TextClick on the Settings The displays values. settings object select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse modified. tobe object barcode 2D the Click on G F E D Changes tothesize of the dot on Control thespacing between adjacent dots. Select the number ofrowsSelect the and colu Display and mark therectDisplay Profileson the page. comprise acharacter. The laser is controlssetting This thelaserw numberoftimes the thelaserisoff The time pulse. on duringasingle laser is time the of The length between successive pulses. between successive angular outline that represangular outline screenmark. the on have noeffect turned on using the settings of using thesettings turned on mns mns of dots toplaceineachcell. ill firedot within each at ents each individualcell. frequency pulse widthfound and WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES the array ofdots that Mark Entities G F E D

6 -79 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

To modify linear bar code Circle settings 1 Click on the linear barcode object to be modified. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”.

3 Click on the Settings tab. The Settings page displays the Text object settings values.

4 In the Mark Style drop-down, select “Circles”.

A B C

The Circles Settings page A The spacing between adjacent circles. B The number of straight line vector segments that make up the circle. C The diameter of each individual circle. D Display and mark the rectangular outline that represents each individual bar

6 -80 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify 2D bar code Circle settings 4 3 2 1 B A A The Circles Settingspage In the Mark Style drop-down, select “Circles”. select MarkStyleIn the drop-down, tab. Settings page the TextClick on the Settings The displays values. settings object select “Properties...”. and click Right-mouse bemodified. to object barcode linear the Click on E D C B The ofrowsnumber and columns ofci Display and mark therectDisplay circle. ofeachindividual The diameter The ofstraightnumber linevector The spacingbetweenadjacentcircles. angular outline that represangular outline segments that make up the circle.the make up segments that rcles are that cell. each in placed ents each individualcell WinLaseUser Guide LAN JOB ENTITIES Mark Entities E D C

6 -81 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

VECTOR GRAPHIC OBJECT Unlike JPEGs, GIFs, and BMP images, vector graphics are not made up of a grid of pixels. Instead, vector graphics are comprised of paths, which are defined by a start and end point, along with other points, curves, and angles along the way. A path can be a line, a square, a triangle, or a curvy shape. These paths can be used to create simple drawings or complex diagrams. Paths are even used to define the characters of specific typefaces.

Because vector-based images are not made up of a specific number of pixels, they can be scaled to a larger size and not lose any image quality. When you scale up a vector graphic, the edges of each object within the graphic stay smooth and clean. Vector images are ideal for use with laser marking equipment, as the scan head is a vector output device.

To modify Vector Graphic curve settings

NOTE • Curve settings are available only on Vector objects that were originally imported from a DXF or DWG file.

1 Click on the Vector Graphic to be modified.

2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. 3 Click on the Settings tab. The Settings page displays the Vector object settings.

B C A D E F G H

6 -82 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en of BITS. See See of BITS. Without this WMF WLO PLT EMF DXF DWG File Type for import behaviorwith the diff this the vectorcoordinatesin file contained inthe Some vectorgraphicsfi SIZE AT ACTUAL GRAPHICS IMPORTING A The Vector page Settings graphic C B D G F E H The size that each individual Po each individual that The size The time thelaserisoffbetweensu The time The length oftime the laser is on duri no effectonthemark. The number of times to pulse the laser the times topulse of The number segments will producesegments curve, asmoother segments number ofstraightlinevector Select the vectors. Moreprod segmentswill segmen number ofstraightlinevector Select the vectors. Moreprod segmentswill segmen number ofstraightlinevector Select the number ofvectors. vectors. More into curve a text segmentswill vector segments number ofstraightline Select the Unit information, WinLase LAN Unit “Coordinate System Conventions” on page No No No Optional Optional Optional Contains Units information, WinLase LAN will impor les, such as les, suchas EMF, DXFand DWG f int entityis displayed on the screen erent graphics files.WinLaseLAN. uce asmoother curve, uce asmoother curve, ccessive pulses at ng a single pulse ateachPoint entity.ng asingle can use it to import the the toimport useit can at each Point entitylocation.WinLasePoint each at LAN. Units are always in BITS in always Units are BITS in always Units are BITS in always Units are coordinate values in f ar they detected, Unitsare If User ispresented with import options User ispresented with import options behavior import LAN WinLase but will increasebut vectors. of thenumber produce butwillincreasecurve, asmoother the to realworlddimensions ts to usewhenrenderingts to into section aspline ts to usewhenrenderingts to arc an into section to usewhenrendering to vectors. More into text to use renderingwhen aBeziercureve section of each Pointentity. but will increasebut will number ofvectors. the increasebut will number ofvectors. the t the graphict the usi

ile assumed tobeBITS ile 5

iles, containinformation toscale -1 . graphic to“actual size”. Referefollowing tothetable in WinLase ThisLAN. value has WinLaseUser Guide LAN e used. If no Units detected, detected, no Units If used. e JOB ENTITIES . If the filecontains . If ng dimensionunits Mark Entities

6 -83 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Mark Entities

When importing DXF and DWG files 1 Form the Main menu, click File > Import. The Import dialog box appears. 2 Browse to a DXF or a DWG file and click Open. The Import AutoCAD file dialog appears.

A B C

D E

The Import AutoCAD dialog window A The version of the file being imported. B The Units that were detected in the file. AutoCAD version 14 and older did not support real world units and the graphic units will be indicated as “Unspecified”. C Select what action WinLase LAN should take when importing the graphic: • Automatic - This is the default setting. If the file was saved with real world units, it will be imported and sized in WinLase LAN to actual size. If the units in the file are unspecified, WinLase LAN assumes the units are Millimeters when converting coordinates. • English - Forces WinLase LAN to use units of Inches when converting coordinates. • Metric - Forces WinLase LAN to use units of Millimeters when converting coordinates. D If an image will size import larger that the field size, this option will scale the image to just fit into the field. Note that the graphic will no longer be actual size. E This option will center the image in the field independant of where it was drawn with respect to the origin.

6 -84 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en be executedon the LEC-1 cont itself. Some Automationobjects valid arefor execution locallythecan PCand on some also XY Motion - • • • • • • • • • Linear Motion - • • Time Insert Delay • Custom Axis • • following Automation Objects: mark a toautomate controllers Automation Objectsprovideameanstocomm ...... AUTOMATION OBJECTS programmed input is received. available inStand-Alone mode. rotation basedon datainan motion. Notavailable available inStand-Alone mode. TableXY Wait forExternal Signal Show Messagebox Set I/OPort Serial Communication file. Not available in Run Application rotary motion. Not availableinStand-Alone mode. Rotary- Motion Indexer. NotavailableinStand-Alone mode. Rotary Indexer mode. ControlLaser Alignment Tool using aCOMport. Notavailable in Stand-Alone mode. Not availableinStand-Alonelinear motion. mode. Alone mode. can becustomizedthe MotorController from message box is closed befo box is closed message - OMS Controller only. -OMSController object An used - Sets a User OutoutputaSets port - Intelligent Motion only - OMSController only. An object used , which provides direct control of a providescontrol of direct, which -OMSControlleronly. object An usedtocontrol anattached Rotary - Providesthe ability to transfor Intelligent Motion only. Anobject used Intelligent Motiononly - Anobject used tostart an external executable file oran external batch - Inserts a specifieda- Inserts time delaybetween objects within ajob. - Displays amessagebox on scre Stand-Alone mode. in Stand-Alone mode. - An object- An usedtooutput asi -AnobjectTheUser usedtopoll ing process,andtoautomate re continuing.re Notavaila roller card in Stand-Alone m alignmentfile, orinamemory bufferlocation. Not . An object used tocontrol twoaxesconfigured asxy . An objectused tocontrol anaxisconfigured as HIGH, LOW, or pulses the output. unicate with external Properties dialog. Not available in Stand-in available Properties dialog. Not m and objects posit m andobjects tocontrol anattached XY Table. Not laser. Notavailable in Stand-Alone ble inStand-Alone mode. to control an attached motor that en, and the job waits until the ngle string, or series of strings ode. WinLase LANsupports the a process within WinLase within LAN a process to control an axisconfigured as In inputs and waituntil that a WinLaseUser Guide LAN Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES handlersand motion ion scalingand

6 -85 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

ALIGNMENT TOOL WinLase LAN supports the use of alignment files during job execution. Alignment files are text based files that describe offsets and rotation to be applied to the complete job. The alignment tool object also supports manually entered alignment data, as well as the ability to get the alignment data from one of the internal memory buffers. When an Alignment Tool object executes, the alignment changes are applied to all objects in the job. Multiple alignment tasks can be accomplished by adding as many Alignment Tool objects as required.

NOTE • Not available in Stand-Alone mode

To modify Alignment Tool settings 1 Click on the desired Alignment Tool Object in Object Manager. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. The Alignment Tool Properties window appears.

A D B E C F

The Alignment Tool property page with “Use settings from this object” selected A The X offset amount to apply to all objects in the job. B The Y offset amount to apply to all objects in the job.

6 -86 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en D C E F B A ToolThe Alignment property pagewhen“Imp G C The amount ofrotation toap support 3-axis scanning forth job.(deThethe focus)in scanning objects amountThe Zoffset all to toapply hardware must The Xcenter of rotation used center ofrotationcoordi would bethe the centerofrotationcente = 0,Y X center wouldbe center ofrotationcoordi would bethe the centerofrotationcente = 0,Y X center wouldbe The Ycenterofrotation usedwhenapplyingAngle. When editing is complete, th iscomplete, editing When ha that file Alignment An existing w file newAlignment location. A becreatedfile can Alignment new A byclicki settings. the this buttontotest Click Toclick the file, Alignment load anexisting e changes can be saved back e changescanbesavedback ply toallobjects in the job. whenapplying Angle. Torotate an is valuetohaveany affect. ith default settings iscreated. settings ith default s alreadycan beed loaded been BC AB nates of the center of the object. the of nates ofthecenter nates of the center of the object. the of nates ofthecenter ort settingsfrom isselected alignmentfile” Browse the Alignment buttontolocate file. ng the Newbutt the ng To rotate an object about r =0.To rotate aboutitscenter, theobject the r =0.To rotate aboutitscenter, theobject the to the file by clicking Save. by to thefile on andchoosing objectthe about centerfield, of the ited by clicking the Editbutton. the clicking ited by WinLaseUser Guide LAN Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES the center of the field, centerofthe the a file nameand a D

6 -87 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

D The name of the current alignment file.

A B

The Alignment Tool property page when “Get settings from memory buffer” is selected A Select and index value from 1 to 10, corresponding the 10 memory buffers available. B Displays the current contents of the internal memory buffer. The buffers are initialized with a '?' when the application starts.

6 -88 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 10.00000,20.00000,0.00000,45.000,0.00000,0.00000 and will rotate allobjec Example: The following stringwill offset a ycenter =millimete xcenter =millimete angle =degrees, with zoffset =millimete yoffset = millimeters, with xoffset = millimeters, with where: ,,,,, buffer,When sendingastringtomemory it STRING BUFFER THE FORMATTING rs, with 5 decimal places(0.0000) with 5 rs, rs, with 5 decimalrs, with5places(0.0000) decimalrs, with5places(0.0000) 5 decimal places(0.0000) ts about the center of the field45 degrees: 5 decimal places(0.0000) 5 decimal places(0.0000) ll objects10mm inthe jobby inX, 20mm inY must be formatted in the following way: WinLaseUser Guide LAN Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES

6 -89 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

CUSTOM AXIS The Custom Axis Object provides control over a generic motor axis. The custom axis can be configured for either linear or rotary applications. An optional OMS PCIx-004 motor controller card is required to control the external motor axis.

NOTE • Not available in Stand-Alone mode

To modify Custom Axis settings 1 Click on the desired Custom Axis Object in Object Manager.

2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. The Custom Axis Properties window appears.

CDE F

H A B I

The Custom Axis property page A The units in which the “Move to” values are displayed, which can be one of the following: • The units are in mm of travel along the parts surface. • The units are in inches of travel along the parts surface. • Displays only if the axis has been set up as a rotary axis. The units are in degrees of motor rotation. • The units are in steps of motor rotation. B The mode of the motor movement, which can be one of the following: • Absolute - The motor will move to the actual absolute position indicated in “Move to”.

6 -90 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en E D C F G H I Relative, the motor will move theamount willmove themotor Relative, the motor will move totheabsolute motor towh The positiontomovethe Apply thecurrentva position The currentposition in amount movethe motor will The - Relative • The speed at which the motor the which The speedat Executes the the indicated “Move to”settings Executes Executes the Home command immedi Home command the Executes Immediately stops movement of the custom motor axis. motor custom the of movement stops Immediately count ofthemotor lue to the “Moveto”value the to lue will executethemove in steps/s. position indicated in“Moveto position en the object is executed. If If isexecuted. en theobject ately on the custom motor axis. motor on thecustom ately in “Move to”from immediately on the custom motor axis custom the on immediately “Move to”from“Move the its currentposition. the Movesare settingisAbsolute, ”. If arethe Moves setting is WinLaseUser Guide LAN currentposition. motor Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES

6 -91 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

INSERT TIME DELAY The Insert Time Delay objects inserts a specified time delay between objects within a process.

To modify Insert Time Delay settings 1 Click on the desired Insert Time Delay Object in Object Manager. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. The Insert Time Delay Properties window appears.

The Insert Time Delay property page A Specifies the delay time in ms. B If this option is selected, the time delay will execute on the LEC-1 device using the Windows CE timer. Otherwise, it will execute on the PC using the PC timer.

6 -92 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Laser Control settings 2 1 E D C B A B C A The LaserControl Settingspropertypage NOTE a job. context of a waytotu object provides The LaserControl LASER CONTROL appears. Right-mouse click and select“Properties and click Right-mouse Manager.in Object Object Control Laser desired the Click on The power the laser wi Turn -Turns specifiedtime laseronfor thelase • The frequency ofthelasercontro Turnturns laseron-leave on and Immediately • Turnlaser offwh the -Immediatelyturns laseroff • Select from thefollo the object executes, thenturns laseroff. executes, the object laser is alreadylaser on,thissetting willdonothing. on by a previousa on by Control Laser Ifthela object. Not available inStand-Alone mode • wing control modes: ll use when it turns on. ll use when l signal whenthelaserturns on. ...”. The Laser Control Properties window window Properties Control Laser ...”. The rn the laser onandoffthe rn the within directly ser isalreadynothing. will do thissetting off, r on for the time specified in “Duration” when time specifiedin“Duration” for the r on the laseronwhen en the object executes, if the laser wasturned ifthelaser executes, en theobject WinLaseUser Guide LAN Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES object executes. If the If object executes.

6 -93 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

D The pulse width of the laser control signal when the laser turns on. E The duration the laser is on if Mode is set to “Turn laser on for specified time”

6 -94 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Linear Motion settings 2 1 J I H G F E D C B A B A SettingspropertyMotion The Linear page NOTE job. the within objects marking with provides controlMotion object ove The Linear MOTION LINEAR appears. select“Properties...” and click Right-mouse Manager. inObject Object Motion Linear desired the Click on • Move to an absolute po absolute toan Move • Select from thefollowingMove modes: configuredthein Motion Configuration. SeeUnderstandingMotion Types. the to object this motion Assign Perform ahomingroutinewill perf axis The - • Move a relative amount- will axis The move the • position when the objectexecutes. executes. “Move” whentheobject of the axis when the object executes. object the of theaxiswhen Not available inStand-Alone mode • sition - The axis will move - Theaxis will sition a specific hardwarea specific axis.There thecorrect be must type motion . The Linear Motion Properties window Properties window Motion Linear . The r a linear motionaxis,a andissynchronized r orm a homing routinea orm settings onthehome based amount in“Move” amount from the current motor to theactualabsolute WinLaseUser Guide LAN Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES position indicated in position N M L K

6 -95 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

• Stop the axis - The axis will be stopped if it was moving as a result of a previous motion object when the object executes. • Move continuously in the positive direction - The axis will move towards the positive limit when the object executes. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. • Move continuously in the negative direction - The axis will move towards the negative limit when the object executes. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. C A reset condition can be configured so that after the specified number of cycles, the axis will perform a reset function. The reset modes are: • - Disable the reset functionality • Move to an absolute position - The axis will move to the actual absolute position indicated in “Reset to” when the reset condition is met. • Move a relative amount - The axis will move the amount in “Reset to” from the current motor position when the reset condition is met. • Perform a homing routine - The axis will perform a homing routine based on the home settings of the axis when the reset condition is met. • Move continuously in the positive direction - The axis will move towards the positive limit when the reset condition is met. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. • Move continuously in the negative direction - The axis will move towards the negative limit when the reset condition is met. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. D The amount to move the axis when performing a normal move E The initial speed the axis moves at while accelerating to the slew speed F The acceleration rate of the axis when changing from the initial speed to the slew speed G The object can be configured to skip execution by setting this parameter greater than 1. For example, to execute the object every third job cycle, set this value to 3. H The amount to move the axis when performing a reset move I After the axis has completed the preprogrammed motion, wait for an amount of time before executing the next object in the job list. J When the option is selected, all axis movement will be opposite normal movement K The maximum speed the axis will attain when executing a move. L The deceleration rate of the axis when changing from the slew speed to a stop at the end of the programmed travel. M The number of cycles the object needs to execute before triggering a reset. When the reset is triggered, the axis will perform the action specified in “Reset move mode”. N Change the display units for all values in the current window.

6 -96 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Rotary Indexer settings 2 1 D C B A B A The RotaryIndexer propertypage NOTE requi motor controllercardis PCIx-004 OMS The RotaryIndexerObjectcontrolove provides ROTARY INDEXER appears. Rotary The select“Properties...”. Properties and window Indexer click Right-mouse Manager. Rotaryin Object desired the Click on Object Indexer C example, if the cycle is set to 2, 2, to isset if the cycle example, processof befo Enter theamount toexecute cycles and allows adistance along thepart rotated.being is The radiusofthepart value This • The The units are ininches of • The units are in mm of travel along the parts surface. • are to”values which the“Move in The units will rotate. Not available inStand-Alone mode • E travel alongtheparts surface. the process twocomp complete must GH FG to to be entered inthe“Move to” value. displayed, which can be can which displayed, red tocontrolexternal the rotary indexer. used to calculate the circumference the used calculate to ofthepart, r an externalrotary indexer. An optional re rotarythe For itsmove. indexerexecutes WinLaseUser Guide LAN lete cycles beforelete cycles theindexer one ofthefollowing: Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES K J I

6 -97 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

• Displays only if the axis has been set up as a rotary axis. The units are in degrees of motor rotation. • The units are in steps of motor rotation. D The mode of the motor movement, which can be one of the following: • Absolute - The motor will move to the actual absolute position indicated in “Move to”. • Relative - The motor will move the amount in “Move to” from the current motor position. E The current position count of the motor F Apply the current position value to the “Move to” value G The amount to move the motor to when the object is executed. If the Moves are setting is Absolute, the motor will move to the absolute position indicated in “Move to”. If the Moves are setting is Relative, the motor will move the amount in “Move to” from its current position. H The speed at which the motor will execute the move in steps/s. I Executes the indicated “Move to” settings immediately on the axis J Executes the Home command immediately on the axis. K Immediately stops movement of the axis.

6 -98 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Rotary Motion settings 2 1 J I H G F E D C B A B A The Rotary Motion Settingsproperty page NOTE synchronized with markingobjects within the job. provide The RotaryMotionobject ROTARY MOTION appears. select“Properties...” and click Right-mouse Manager. Rotary Object desired in the Click on Object Motion • Move to an absolute po absolute toan Move • Select from thefollowingMove modes: configuredthein Motion Configuration. SeeUnderstandingMotion Types. the to object this motion Assign Perform ahomingroutinewill perf axis The - • Move a relative amount- will axis The move the • position when the objectexecutes. executes. “Move” whentheobject of the axis when the object executes. object the of theaxiswhen Not available inStand-Alone mode • sition - The axis will move - Theaxis will sition a specific hardwarea specific axis.There thecorrect be must type motion s control over anexternalrotaryindexeraxis, andis control s . The Rotary Motion Properties window window Rotary. The Properties Motion orm a homing routinea orm settings onthehome based amount in“Move” amount from the current motor to theactualabsolute WinLaseUser Guide LAN Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES position indicated in position O N M L K

6 -99 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

• Stop the axis - The axis will be stopped if it was moving as a result of a previous motion object when the object executes. • Move continuously in the positive direction - The axis will move towards the positive limit when the object executes. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. • Move continuously in the negative direction - The axis will move towards the negative limit when the object executes. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. C A reset condition can be configured so that after the specified number of cycles, the axis will perform a reset function. The reset modes are: • - Disable the reset functionality • Move to an absolute position - The axis will move to the actual absolute position indicated in “Reset to” when the reset condition is met. • Move a relative amount - The axis will move the amount in “Reset to” from the current motor position when the reset condition is met. • Perform a homing routine - The axis will perform a homing routine based on the home settings of the axis when the reset condition is met. • Move continuously in the positive direction - The axis will move towards the positive limit when the reset condition is met. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. • Move continuously in the negative direction - The axis will move towards the negative limit when the reset condition is met. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. D The amount to move the axis when performing a normal move E The initial speed the axis moves at while accelerating to the slew speed F The acceleration rate of the axis when changing from the initial speed to the slew speed G The object can be configured to skip execution by setting this parameter greater than 1. For example, to execute the object every third job cycle, set this value to 3. H The amount to move the axis when performing a reset move I After the axis has completed the preprogrammed motion, wait for an amount of time before executing the next object in the job list. J When the option is selected, all axis movement will be opposite normal movement K The maximum speed the axis will attain when executing a move. L The deceleration rate of the axis when changing from the slew speed to a stop at the end of the programmed travel. M The number of cycles the object needs to execute before triggering a reset. When the reset is triggered, the axis will perform the action specified in “Reset move mode”. N The radius of the part being marked. This value is useful to scale distances on the surface of the part. O Change the display units for all values in the current window.

6 -100 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Run ApplicationTo modify settings 2 1 E D C B A A The Run Application propertypage NOTE or batchfilesynchronized The Run ApplicationObjectprovides a way for APPLICATION RUN appears. select“Properties...” and click Right-mouse Manager. inObject Object Application Run desired the Click on B C D path to the file can be spec be can path tothefile folderlocationwhereThe default th batch file bethe withextensiononly.must filename If The program or batch file torun.If the first space aftertheprograthe firstspace topass parameters toth Optional command line mustbe specifiedhere. orbatchfile to theexecutable Time closesbefore towaitafterapplication Not available inStand-Alone mode • with the execution of mark execution of with the ified intheProgramparameter. m file name. Any additional spaces required Anyadditional name. file m here. specified be must the Default path is set to afold is set path Default the e program orbatchfileexists. Th executing the next object inthejoblist. nextobject the executing e e program. WinLase LANw . The Run Application Properties window window Properties Application Run . The the application to start an external program no Default Path isset, no Default ing objects within a job. ing objectswithin WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase er location, then the programthe then er location, or is setting is optional as the is settingoptionalasthe full Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES the fully qualified path qualified fully the ill automaticallyinsert G F

6 -101 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

E Select this option to wait for the program or batch file to exit before WinLase LAN continues. If the box is not checked, WinLase LAN starts the program or batch file, and then continues to the next object in the Object list after the Continue delay F Select the default path. G Select the batch file or program to execute.

Testing the configuration settings • After configuring the settings click the test button. The program or batch file you are referencing will run.

6 -102 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify SerialCommunication settings 2 1 G F E D C B A A property when page Communication Serial The NOTE Serial Communication series of strings using aCOM port. A vali providesThe SerialCommunicationObjectawa SERIAL COMMUNICATION window appears. window Right-mouse click and select“Properties and click Right-mouse Manager. Object in Object SerialCommunication desired the Click on C B D Configures theobjecttosend a met when this object executes. If If executes. when this object met WinLasebox ischecked, this LANwillgeneratean responsea Select thisoptionif is expectedfrom TransmitThe stringtosendwhen selected. is text of line asingle The responseexpected string box. Not available inStand-Alone mode • Object tofunction. from device. theconnected single line of text using the COM port when the object executes. object the port when using the COM lineoftext single no responseor toi is expected, d Windowsconfigured fora COM portmustbe Transmit isselected lineoftext asingle ...”. The Serial Communication Properties Properties SerialCommunication ...”. The the device WinLase thedevice LAN is errorthe respon messageif y for the applicationtooutput astringor y forthe gnoreresponse,a thischeck clear WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES communicating with. communicatingwith. If se conditions arese conditions not

6 -103 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

E The time to wait for the response back from the connected device. F The control character \r will be added to the end of all string sent to the COM port. G The control character \n will be added to the end of all string sent to the COM port.

E F G

C D

The Serial Communication property page when Transmit multiple lines of text using a script file A Configures the object to send multiple lines of text contained in a script file. See Serial Communication Script File Format for details on the script file format. B The fully qualified path to the script file containing the strings to be transmitted. See Serial Communication Script File Format for details on the script file format. C The control character \r will be added to the end of all string sent to the COM port. D The control character \n will be added to the end of all string sent to the COM port. E Create and save a script file by clicking this button. F Edit an existing script file by clicking this button. G Locate and insert a script file by clicking this button.

Configuring WinLase LAN to allow Serial Communication 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the COM Ports tab. The COM Ports page appears.

6 -104 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 3 D C B A of this file. of this found inthe file line by linein the order During executionof afunction us FILEFORMAT SCRIPT COMMUNICATION SERIAL G F E D C B A The Communication Objectspage settings appear.settings configuration The mouse. the Objects listwith the linein the Communication Select successfully, the Status an error port, COM open thespecified message Click this button to apply anychanges madein setting. COM port setting. COM port setting. COM port setting. COM port The Windowsassigned COMport. COM port Objects. fortheCommunication applying thischange,attempt an toopen theCO Selecting thisoptionwill make a COM port av isupdated to Connected. ing a script file, WinLase L found. The following secti ailable totheCommunic the Communication Objects page.If WinLase cannot is displayed.Ifthe M port is made. De-select the optiontodisablethe the De-select isM port made. AN will transmit the strings WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase COM port was opened COM ation Objects. ation Objects. When Automation Objects on describes the format JOB ENTITIES G F E

6 -105 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

COMMAND SET The following list describes all the Script file commands and their intended use.

Command delimiter= Purpose: Sets the character to use to separate individual values within a single command string Parameters: delimiter: The delimiter character. Comments: This command must appear in the list before a string that contains a delimiter. If no delimiter command is found in the list, the default "," (comma) is used by WinLase to detect individual values within the command line. Example: Delimiter=;

Command delay= Purpose: Creates a delay before the next line in the script file is transmitted. Parameters: time: The time, in milliseconds, to delay before processing the next line in the script file Comments: Time must be greater that 0, or it is ignored. Example: Delay=10

Command Purpose: A string to be transmitted. No response is expected with this command format. Parameters: command: The actual string to be transmitted. Comments: Example: ATTN

Command Purpose: A string to be transmitted. A response is expected with this command format Parameters: command: The actual string to be transmitted. delimiter: The delimiter specified with the delimiter command. response: The response string expected. timeout: The period of time, in milliseconds, to wait for the response string. Comments: A response is expected with this command format, and an error will be generated by WinLase if the expected response is not received within the timeout period. Example: ATTN,ACK,100

6 -106 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en QUIT//Sendsstring the 'QUIT' delay=500//Pauses 500mSbefore 'SQF', a SQF;ACK;50//Sends thestring ATN//Sends the string 'ATN delimiter=;//Sets the delimiter for the following strings to ; LAN ScriptFileformat. The following example illustrates howto use all the commands available with the WinLase SCRIPT FILEEXAMPLE ', don'tcare about response executing the next line executingthe nd waits 50 mS for the response 'ACK' mS forthe 50 nd waits WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES

6 -107 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

SET I/O PORT Set I/O Port objects set the status of the specific output port either high or low depending on the settings.

To modify Set I/O Port settings 1 Click on the desired Set I/O Port Object in the Object Manager. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. The Properties window displays the Set I/O Port property values.

A B C

The Set I/O Port property page A Specifies one of the following actions: • Set Port HIGH - The selected port will switch to the HIGH state. The port will stay HIGH until changed by another Set Port Object. • Set Port LOW - The selected port will switch to the LOW state. The port will stay LOW until changed by another Set Port Object. • Pulse Port (LOW-HIGH-LOW) - The selected port starts LOW, will switch to HIGH for the indicated duration, and then switch back LOW. Note that the duration value is approximate. • Set WORD - The WORD value is a 20-bit value, corresponding to the possible 20 output ports on the LEC-1 device. Each of the 20 output ports will switch to HIGH if the corresponding bit is set in the Word value. After the object executes, all ports will stay at their last signaled states. B The specific I/O port that is signaled when the object has executed i C When the Set Word action is selected, Word value appears. Set this to a value from 0-1048576.

6 -108 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify ShowMessagebox settings 2 1 B A B A The Show Messagebox propertypage NOTE a job. The message mu Use theShowMessagebox Objectstodisplay SHOW MESSAGEBOX window appears. window select“Properti and click Right-mouse Manager. Object in object Messagebox Show desired the Click on The string of text thatw The stringoftext bar oftheMessagebox. title the in appearwill that The text Not available inStand-Alone mode • st be acknowledged andclosedbefo ill appearintheMessagebox. es...”. The Show Messagebox Properties Properties Messagebox Show es...”. The an on-screen messageduringtheexecution of re the process WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES will continue.

6 -109 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

WAIT FOR EXTERNAL SIGNAL The Wait for External Signal Object polls an I/O port for an input and waits until that input is received before the process continues.

To modify Wait for External Signal settings 1 Click on the desired Wait for External Signal object in the Object Manager. 2 Right-mouse click and select “Properties...”. The Properties window displays the Wait for External Signal property values.

A B C

The Wait For External Signal property page A Select the port to wait for a signal on. B The window message displayed in WinLase LAN when the object is executing. C Select from the following Trigger mode options: • After transition from LOW -> HIGH - The LEC-1 device will trigger only when a transition from LOW to HIGH is detected. (Edge Detection) • After transition from HIGH -> LOW - The LEC-1 device will trigger only when a transition from HIGH to LOW is detected. (Edge Detection) • If port is LOW - The LEC-1 device will trigger if the port is LOW when checked, or if the port switches from HIGH to LOW. (Level Detection) • If port is HIGH - The LEC-1 device will trigger if the port is HIGH when checked, or if the port switches from LOW to HIGH. (Level Detection)

6 -110 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en settingsXY Table To modify 2 1 B A C B A TableThe XY property page NOTE 004 motorrequire controllercardis The XYTableprovidesan Objectcontrolover XY TABLE Right-mouse click and select“Properties...” and click Right-mouse XYTable desired the Click on Manager. inObject object The currentposition in amount movethe motor will The - Relative • Absolute - The motor will move • wh The modeofthemotormovement, are The units rotation. of motor steps in • • Displays only if theaxishasb only if Displays • The units are ininches of • The units are in mm of travel along the parts surface. • are to”values which the“Move in The units rotation. Not available inStand-Alone mode • count ofthemotor C travel alongtheparts surface. een set up asa rotaryeen set Th axis. to the actual absolute po absolute totheactual EF DE d to control the external XY Table.external d tocontrolthe ich can beoneofthefollowing: displayed, which can be can which displayed, . The XYTable. The appears. window Properties external XY Table. An optional OMSPCIx- “Move to”from“Move the sition indicated in“Moveto”. sition e units are indegrees ofmotor WinLaseGuide User LAN one ofthefollowing: currentposition. motor Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES I H G

6 -111 6 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

D Apply the current position value to the “Move to” value E The amount to move the motor to when the object is executed. If the Moves are setting is Absolute, the motor will move to the absolute position indicated in “Move to”. If the Moves are setting is Relative, the motor will move the amount in “Move to” from its current position. F The speed at which the motor will execute the move in steps/s. G Executes the indicated “Move to” settings immediately on the axis H Executes the Home command immediately on the axis. I Immediately stops movement of the axis.

6 -112 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en settings XY Motion To modify 2 1 J I H G F E D C B A B A property MotionSettings The XY page NOTE job. the within objects marking with object provides The XYMotion XY MOTION appears. select“Properti and click Right-mouse Manager. Objectin XYMotion thedesired Click on • Move to an absolute po absolute toan Move • Select from thefollowingMove modes: configuredthein Motion Configuration. SeeUnderstandingMotion Types. the to object this motion Assign Perform ahomingroutinewill perf axis The - • Move a relative amount- will axis The move the • position when the objectexecutes. executes. “Move” whentheobject of the axis when the object executes. object the of theaxiswhen Not available inStand-Alone mode • sition - The axis will move - Theaxis will sition a specific hardwarea specific axis.There thecorrect be must type motion control over an external XY external control overan es...”. The XY Motion Properties window Propertieswindow XYMotion es...”. The orm a homing routinea orm settings onthehome based amount in“Move” amount from the current motor to theactualabsolute Table, andis synchronized WinLaseUser Guide LAN Automation Objects JOB ENTITIES position indicated in position O N M L K

6 -113 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Automation Objects

• Stop the axis - The axis will be stopped if it was moving as a result of a previous motion object when the object executes. • Move continuously in the positive direction - The axis will move towards the positive limit when the object executes. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. • Move continuously in the negative direction - The axis will move towards the negative limit when the object executes. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. C A reset condition can be configured so that after the specified number of cycles, the axis will perform a reset function. The reset modes are: • - Disable the reset functionality • Move to an absolute position - The axis will move to the actual absolute position indicated in “Reset to” when the reset condition is met. • Move a relative amount - The axis will move the amount in “Reset to” from the current motor position when the reset condition is met. • Perform a homing routine - The axis will perform a homing routine based on the home settings of the axis when the reset condition is met. • Move continuously in the positive direction - The axis will move towards the positive limit when the reset condition is met. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. • Move continuously in the negative direction - The axis will move towards the negative limit when the reset condition is met. The axis will continue to move until either hitting a limit switch, or if stopped by another motion object. D The amount to move the axis when performing a normal move E The initial speed the axis moves at while accelerating to the slew speed F The acceleration rate of the axis when changing from the initial speed to the slew speed G The object can be configured to skip execution by setting this parameter greater than 1. For example, to execute the object every third job cycle, set this value to 3. H The amount to move the axis when performing a reset move I After the axis has completed the preprogrammed motion, wait for an amount of time before executing the next object in the job list. J When the option is selected, all axis movement will be opposite normal movement K The maximum speed the axis will attain when executing a move. L The deceleration rate of the axis when changing from the slew speed to a stop at the end of the programmed travel. M The number of cycles the object needs to execute before triggering a reset. When the reset is triggered, the axis will perform the action specified in “Reset move mode”. N The radius of the part being marked. This value is useful to scale distances on the surface of the part. O Change the display units for all values in the current window.

6 -114 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en a TemplateObject To edit To create a Template Object 1 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 edited. To edit aTemplate Obje then converted toaTemplateback converted then Object. alignmentgraphics or features,notes, a Template. Template Object follows the same steps as editi To edit the Template Object, it must be converted back to a mark object first. Removing a OBJECT TEMPLATE THE REMOVING OR EDITING page page on files” Graphic “Importing Template objects are mark objects that ha OBJECT A TEMPLATE CREATING A Templateobject. Objectiscreated from A Template Object isagraphicdisp that is ...... TEMPLATE OBJECT From the Main menu, click Job Manager > Convert Template > Convert Manager Job click menu, Main the From toObject. Template”. to “Convert select and selectObjects Template, to menu, > main Convert the From object, clickthe right or Object. aTemplate to converted be cannot agroup that it.Note clicking by the object Select workarea. the within graphic the sizeof and position the Edit See button. object system appropriate the clicking Template makea to by used Job the itto graphic add If the object, isasystem Object Template makea to used file. See the graphic If the import file, isanexternal Object creating aTemplatecreating Object. Stepfrom 4for above process the follow then changes, desired the make If editing, theTemplate,If removing list. ObjectManager the from markobject deletethe simply list. Object Manager the of end the Template to The isadded and Manager Job the from isremoved Object

-16 . ct, itmustbeconvertedback

-17 of the actual part beingprocessed. actual of the . ve been convertedto a Mark Objectand onc workarea, butisnotamarking layed inthe Template are Objects ng, except the object is notconvertedtoobject back except the ng, “Adding a System Entity” on Entity” System a “Adding into aMarkObject, edited, and WinLaseUser Guide LAN aTemplate object. useful fordisplaying e converted, cannotbe e JOB ENTITIES Template Object

6 -115 . . . . . JOB ENTITIES 6 Template Object

6 -116 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en MARKING JOBS ...... 7 .

This chapter provides an overview of the laser marking of objects and groups of objects and Jobs. In this context, a marking object is any laser markable entity added to an active Job. In WinLase LAN, there is a fundamental difference between marking objects (Job > QuickMark) and running Jobs (Job > Run).

• When using the Job > QuickMark command, Automation objects do not execute. Any special run-time behavior that has been applied to an object, such as TextMerge, serialization, etc. will not be executed when marking the object using QuickMark.

• When using the Job > Run command, all Automation objects, as well as any special runtime behavior of marking objects, will be executed.

.USING ...... PREVIEWMARK ...... When the laser is equipped with a visible pointer and the laser driver file has enabled the visible pointer, PreviewMark is enabled. See “Enabling Visible Pointer control” on page 9 -23. The PreviewMark feature provides a method of visually indicating the outline of an object or group of objects. This visual feedback is accomplished by rapidly tracing the bounding rectangle of the object or group of objects with the visible laser while keeping the marking laser turned off. The mark object can be easily moved around the marking field by using the Ctrl+Arrow key combination and when properly positioned, moved there with a press of the Enter key. Additionally, using the Alt+Arrow key combination can dynamically change the size of the object.

To Preview an object

NOTE • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device, and the Job containing the object(s) to be previewed must be assigned to that device.

1 Select an object or group of objects.

2 To start PreviewMark, do one of the following: • Right click on the object and select “PreviewMark...”. • Press the F4 function key. • From the main menu, select Job > PreviewMark.

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 7 -1 MARKING JOBS 7 Using PreviewMark

3 The PreviewMark window opens and the objects outline displays on the marking field.

To move the outline while it is displaying 1 To move the outline of the object on the marking field, do one of the following: • Click on the up/down/left/right arrows with the mouse. A single click moves the outline once. Holding the mouse button down on the direction arrow will move the outline across the mark field. • While holding the Ctrl key down, press the up/down/left/right arrow keys on the keyboard. A single press moves the outline once. Holding the arrow key down will move the outline across the mark field. 2 When the outline is in the desired position, press the Enter key on the keyboard or click the Apply button with the mouse. The object is repositioned on the screen to the new location.

To scale the outline while it is displaying 1 To scale the outline of the object, do one of the following: • Click on the scale arrows with the mouse. A single click scales the outline a small amount. Holding the mouse button down on the scale arrow will scale the outline continuously. • While holding the Alt key down, press the up/down/left/right arrow keys on the keyboard. A single press scales the outline a small amount. Holding the arrow key down will scale the outline continuously.

7 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To calibratethe Visible Pointer To adjust the outline refresh speed 2 1 2 See See button down, move the bar left speed. thebar the move toadjust down, right or button Withpointer, the mouse bar, slider speed Display the click themouse andwhileholding controls. expandswindow additional show to PreviewMark The button. Settings Click the screen. the isresizedon object The mouse. the with button Apply click the or keyboard the keyon Enter the press size, desired tothe scaled is outline the When “Calibrating the Visi ble Pointer”onpage

-24 . WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS Using PreviewMark

7 -3 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Using the QuickMark Feature

.USING ...... THE . . . . . QUICKMARK...... FEATURE...... Use the QuickMark feature to laser mark the selected object, or group of objects. QuickMark does not apply any special processing to the object such as serialization or TextMerge, etc.

To QuickMark objects

NOTE • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device, and the Job containing the object(s) to be marked must be assigned to that device.

1 Select the object or group of objects to be laser marked. See “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” on page 5 -21.

2 Do one of the following: • From the Main menu, select Job > QuickMark. • Press F8 on the keyboard. • Place the mouse pointer over a marking object, and right-click and select “QuickMark...”. • Click the QuickMark button.

QuickMark tollbar button

WARNING • Laser will turn on immediately. Check the beam path before proceeding.

3 Click the Selected button to mark the single object.

4 Click the All button to mark all objects currently in the Job.

7 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 6 5 are marked,theMarkTime isforth lastthe time tocomplete The elapsed time. mark the display bar the status complete, When amarkis TIME MARK THE CHECKING ESCkey.the Press • Click the Stop button. • To following: the of one do marking, while thelaser stop Stop isclicked. the button until continuously Torepeatedly, object markan will mark object The option. the“Repeat” select e last object markedinthegroup.e lastobject object marked with the withthe QuickMar objectmarked at the bottomof the QuickMark window will Using the QuickMark FeatureUsing the k feature. Ifagroupobjectsof WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS

7 -5 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

.RUNNING ...... JOBS ...... When running Jobs, all Automation objects, as well as any special processing applied to an object will be executed. The three interface modes available in WinLase LAN also differ in the way a Job is executed. When running jobs, the process can be organized into four groups of events:

• Events that occur during Job loading

• Events that occur before a Job is executed

• Events that occur during Job Execution • Events that occur at Job completion

THE JOB LOADING EVENTS The following event fires when a job loads from file: • Show the job Notes. The note can be shown automatically each time the Job is opened. Adding notes to a Job may be helpful when the Job first loads, as a reminder to do a task, etc. before running the Job.

To show a Note when the job loads 1 From the Main menu, select Job > Settings, then click the Notes tab. The Job Notes window appears.

7 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 5 4 3 2 • • • • The following events fire,orde inthe EVENTS IS EXECUTED BEFORE AJOB option loads” Job when Notes Job the “Show Select Click the Job Files tab. The Job File settings page tab. Files settings Job File Click the Job appears. The opens. window Preferences The >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From closes. window Notes Job Click OK.The Type text. Note desired the in objects are outside can continue homing sequence. event Home axes Enter CharacterString event Out ofBoundscheck even (intelligent motion only), which wi (intelligentmotiononly), which the marking field. t, which will show a warniwill show a t, which , which promptsoperator, which the to r listed, beforeajobis executed: ng messageboxifanymarking ll prompt for amotionhardware enter a string before the job before enterastring WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS Running Jobs

7 -7 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

To check if any objects are out of bounds 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. 2 Click on the Device tab. The Device page appears

• Select the “Warn about out of bounds objects before marking” option

To respond to the Enter Character String dialog box • The Enter Character String dialog appears before the job executes if a text object has been programmed to Supply string at start.

1 Enter the required value for the requested string, and click the OK button to continue.

2 Click Cancel to abort the current Job.

7 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To respond to the Home motionaxes event • B A • • • Globals • can that ofevents and anumber settings thatof controlthea number be The are JOB EXECUTION EVENTS D C B A Utility The Home cycled. power been axeshave the until appear again automatically not will Utility Home the once, homed been axeshave the cycle.Once lastpower the since homed been not axeshave Motion ifthe executes thejob before appears Utilitydialog Home The window. power setting for all ma location. Forexample, laser ifthe poweris make changestooperators orengineersto speed, andobject position of positions.mark object once, or aspecified number of times External Startsettings Stepsettings, &Repeat Repeat Process settings, well as the spacing can be saved with the job. with well asthespacingcanbesaved marking field inan array of rows and colu motors will require homingat Stops isstop motor movement If movement. motor Start thehoming process When homingaXYmotion device, select this The that motion axistypes require homing

settings which provide job-widecontrol of

, toconfigure control of Job ex WinLaseLAN offers ability the tochangethe laserpower, scan which configures which options formarking anobject across the rking objects can beslightlyin which the next job executioncycle. thenext happen during the executionof ajob: a markobject fromasingle(gl a

controls whetherthe Job pr before amessagedisplayed. is option to move both option tomove a mns.The number ofrowsandcolumns, as all Jobs run withWiall slowly decreasingbecaus havior of WinLase LAN asit executes aJob ped before thehoming processcompletes, the the laser power, ecution fromexternal equipment. creasedfrom theGlobal settings ocess is run continuously, xes at the same time xes atthesame obal) location. This allows obal) location. WinLaseUser Guide LAN D C MARKING JOBS nLase LAN from asingle mark speed,and e of lampe life, the Running Jobs

7 -9 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

• Mark on the Fly settings, which provides for the marking of moving parts. • Alignment Files settings, which are text based files that describe offsets and rotation to be applied during the execution of the job. The name of the alignment file is saved with the job. Prior to the execution of the job, the alignment file is located and the changes within the file are applied to all objects in the job.

• String Value required event, which prompts the operator to enter a string before the job can continue

• TextMerge file event, which prompts for MergeFile information •An Interlock event, which indicates that a system interlock has been signaled •A System Error event, which indicates that an unexpected error event has occurred

To change the Global settings 1 From the main menu, select System > Globals. The Global Settings window appears.

A D

The Global Settings page A The percent increase or decrease to apply to the laser power settings of all objects within a Job. B The percent increase or decrease to apply to the Mark speed settings of all objects within a Job. C Use these values to “nudge” (offset) all objects within a Job. D To save these settings from session to session, select this option. If the box is unchecked, the applied settings will be used for the current session only and will be lost when the application closes.

7 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en GlobaltheTo change settings frominterface the Touchscreen 2 1 D C C B A D C B A SettingsThe Global page Click the ADJUST button. The Global Settings window appears. window Settings Global The button. ADJUST Click the appears. Touch the From OPTIONSwindow The button. OPTIONS the click interface, screen E Enter numericalvalues (o values to“nudge” Use these The percent increasedecrease or toapplyth The percent increasedecrease or toapplyth Click thesebuttons afield. to edit with these buttons these with ffset) all objects withinaJob. ffset) all e Mark speed settings of all objects within aJob. objects all of e Markspeedsettings settings of e laserpower WinLase UserGuide LAN E MARKING JOBS all objects within a Job. all objectswithina Running Jobs

7 -11 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

To control how a job cycle repeats 1 From the Main menu, select Job > Settings, then click the Repeat Process tab. 2 The Repeat Process Properties window appears.

A B C

D E

The Repeat Process property page A After the operator clicks Go, the Job will execute the objects in the Object Manager list once. The operator must click Go to execute the list again. This process will go on indefinitely. B After the operator clicks Go, the Job will execute the objects in the Object Manager list once. The operator must click Go to execute the list again. This process will stop after # cycles. C The number of cycles used in B D After the operator clicks the Go button, the Job will execute the objects in the Object Manager list repetitively. This option is usually used with an external start signal (Start Mark), otherwise the object list will execute continuously, with no break between successive cycles of the list. E After the operator clicks Go, the Job will execute the objects in the Object Manager list repetitively. This option is usually used with an external start signal, otherwise the object list will execute continuously, with no break between successive cycles of the list. The process will stop after # cycles and display a message.

7 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To continuously save Dynamic string changes 2 1 A A The Repeat Processproperty page value. next timethe The is executing. automatic serialization. These changessabe can During jobexecution,barcod The Repeat Process Properties window appears. window Properties Process Repeat The Processtab.the Repeat click then >Settings, Job select menu, Main the From serialized text objects in a job and the job needs needs and the job inajob objects text serialized everyjob After to cycle completes, the jobis saved e and text objects may be e andtextobjectsmay job is loaded, textorbarcode job is to be saved withthela to be ved to the job file automatically as the job disk. This is useful, fo is useful, Thisdisk. changing theirstringsthrough objects will use the last string WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS st used serial number.st usedserial r example, when therer example, is Running Jobs

7 -13 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

To use Step and Repeat 1 From the Main menu, select Job > Settings, then click the Step & Repeat tab. 2 The Step & Repeat Properties window appears.

A G

B C

D E

F H I

The Step and Repeat property page A Enables/disables step and repeat. B The number of columns in the pattern. C The spacing between each column of marks. D The number of rows in the pattern. E The spacing between each row of marks. F The Pattern offset X Axis and Y-axis will translate all objects in the rows and columns by the amount entered into the field. G The pattern preview H Updates the preview to show recent changes to the step and repeat parameters. I Resets all settings to default values.

7 -14 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To control the jobwithExternalI/O 2 1 B A F E D C A The External Start propertypage The External Start External The appears. window Properties Startthe External click then >Settings, Job tab. select menu, Main the From B D C E Stand-Alone mode, this intheRunProcessclicked dialog box. Note that if If this option is selected, WinLase LAN will start sequence. In the RunProcessthe In sequence. dialog hardwarean external selected, this optionis If si Enter the message displayedin Enter themessage LEC-1 the port on The default device to run in Stand-Alone mode, this option MUST be selected. signal,andwhenreceived,Mark thejob. willexecute streamsLAN immediately device. thejobtoLEC-1 • After transition from After -TheLEC- LOW ->HIGH • Select from thefollowingTrigger mode options: the Start Marksignal. • If port is LOW - The LEC-1 device will trigger if will device LEC-1 The - port isLOW If • transition from After LOW -TheLEC- -> HIGH • switches from HIGHtoLOW. Detection) (Level from Detection) (Edge isdetected. HIGHtoLOW Detection) (Edge from isdetected. HIGH to LOW option is notallowed. option device device is the Start Markinput. the RunProcess dialog box while , , the Gobutton is clicked star to gnal (Start Mark) controls the start of a marking marking a of controls (Start start gnal the Mark) a marking a marking job immediatelyaftertheGo button is a job is being saved to the LEC-1 device to run in to device is beingsavedtotheLEC-1 a job 1 device will trigger only when a transition triggeronlywhena will 1 device 1 device will trigger only when a transition triggeronlywhena will 1 device the port is LOW when checked, or if the port the orif checked, when port isLOW the Note that if a job is being saved to the LEC-1 totheLEC-1 saved job isbeing a thatif Note The LEC-1 device will then wait for the Start will waitforthe then device TheLEC-1 the LEC-1 device is waiting for iswaiting device LEC-1 the WinLaseUser Guide LAN t the process,the t andthenWinLase MARKING JOBS Running Jobs

7 -15 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

• If port is HIGH - The LEC-1 device will trigger if the port is HIGH when checked, or if the port switches from LOW to HIGH. (Level Detection) F Enter a timeout value in minutes to wait for the Start Mark signal. If the timeout expires before an external start signal is received, an error message is displayed. A value of 0 (zero) will wait indefinitely.

7 -16 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To enable marking onmoving parts (Mark onthe Fly) 2 1 B A B A The Mark on the Fly property page NOTE The Mark on the Fly Properties window appears. window FlyProperties the Markon The tab. Fly onthe the Mark click then >Settings, Job select menu, Main the From and when the LEC-1 device executes the marking vecto themarking executes device LEC-1 the and when This option will addaspecifieddelay,option This Enable/disable mark Enable/disable mark on th disable thedistance delay. movementin thepart direction, asthe part speed • Mark on the Fly is Mark onthe • e fly forthecurrente job. in distance, between when the the betweenwhen indistance, only available inStand-Alone mode. changes, the spacing stays constant. Enter 0 to rs. Because this delay rs. Because WinLaseUser Guide LAN Start signalisreceived Mark MARKING JOBS is basedon distance Running Jobs

7 -17 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

To dynamically control marking object alignment 1 From the Main menu, select Job > Settings, then click the Alignment tab. The Alignment page appears.

F G H

C I D J E K

The Alignment property page A Check this option to select and configure an Alignment file B The alignment file C The X offset amount to apply to all objects in the job. D The Y offset amount to apply to all objects in the job. E The Z offset (defocus) amount to apply to all objects in the job. The scanning hardware must support 3-axis scanning for this value to have any effect. F A new Alignment file can be created by clicking the New button and choosing a file name and location. A new Alignment file with default settings is created. G An existing Alignment file that has already been loaded can be edited by clicking the Edit button. When editing is complete, the changes can be saved back to the file by clicking Save. H To load an existing Alignment file, click the Browse button to locate the Alignment file. I The amount of rotation to apply to all objects in the job. J The X center of rotation used when applying Angle. To rotate an object about the center of the field, the center of rotation would be X center = 0, Y center = 0. To rotate the object about its center, the center of rotation would be the coordinates of the center of the object. K The Y center of rotation used when applying Angle. To rotate an object about the center of the field, the center of rotation would be X center = 0, Y center = 0. To rotate the object about its center, the center of rotation would be the coordinates of the center of the object.

7 -18 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To respond to the TextMerge Event dialog box To respond to the EnterCharacter String dialog box 2 1 • • A D C B B A The TextMergeevent dialog. session. marking current the filefor merge the in position start the control to isused window This isrun. Job the when appears window Event TextMerge the use to programmed been has TextMerge object the If atext feature, to programmed been has object ifatext run-time at appears StringCharacter dialog Enter The Click Cancel to abort the current Job. current the abort to Click Cancel continue. to button OK the click and string, requested for the value the required Enter The text object will start retrieving will object The text stringsfrom preserved.be settings will willstartretrieving object The text stringsfrom are visible to the right of the line number edit box. are box. edit thelinenumber of visibletotheright Supply string everymark string Supply . the line number entered.the line the top of the file. Any group Any thetopoffile. # start line #and WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS The available line numbers availableline The Running Jobs

7 -19 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

C When a previous TextMerge Job is run, the last position in the merge file is automatically saved. When selecting this option, the text object will retrieve strings from the bookmark location. Note that this option is grayed out if there was no previous Job which used the merge file. D Click this button to view the TextMerge file

To view the current MergeFile 1 Click the View TextMerge file button. The TextMerge viewer appears.

2 To see the Bookmark line location, click the Go to Bookmark button.

3 Click the X to close the viewer and resume the Job.

JOB COMPLETION EVENTS The following events fire, in the order listed, after a job has completed execution: • The Beam Home event, which provides a means of controlling the position the laser spot takes at the end of a mark sequence. By default, the spot (mirror positions) remains at the end of the last vector that was marked.

• Laser saver event, which provides a means of shutting down the laser and/or reducing its power settings after a timeout period has elapsed. An optional error flag can be set as well.

To change the Beam Home settings 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. 2 Click on the Beam Home tab. The Beam Home page appears.

A B

C D

7 -20 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To change the LaserSaver settings 2 1 D C B A D C B A The LaserSaverpage D C B A Homepage The Beam Click on LaserSaver tab. LaserSaver Click on page LaserSaver The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From This feature is not available on LEC-1 the device. is senttothelaserviaRS-232 port. optionis If this selected, after the specified timeout control thelaserpower, areminimum settings. their to set If this option afte is selected, Enables/disablesLaserSaver the feature. movefromThe speedthespotwill The home position. position. If this option attheend is selected, of a QuickM position. Pr end ofaRun the at selected, this optionis If r the specified timeoutperiod has specified the r its currentits positiontothehomeposition. ocess sequence, the laser sequence,the be ocess ark sequence, the laser beamwill thelaser ark sequence, go tothehome period script has elapsed,acustom de-initialize elapsed, the power ports, which power ports, elapsed, the WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS am will go to the am will home go tothe Running Jobs

7 -21 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Jobs

RUNNING FROM THE WORKSPACE There must be at least one executable object in the Object Manager list and an active connection to an LEC-1 in order to run a Job.

To run a Job from the Job Editing Workspace or Operator Interface

NOTE • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device, and the Job to be run must be assigned to that device.

1 Do one of the following: • From the Main menu, select Job > Run • Press F12 on the keyboard. • Click the Run button.

Run Process toolbar button

WARNING • Laser will turn on immediately. Check beam path before proceeding.

2 Click Go. The Job begins execution.

To stop the Job 1 To stop a running Job, do one of the following: • Click the Stop button. • Press ESC on the keyboard.

7 -22 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To set the default Job Settings Job To stopthe TouchInterfaceScreenfrom the To runaJob 3 2 1 2 1 • • • The Save Settings as Default Button SettingsasDefault The Save bar. tool inJob icon appears. the Settings window Click on Properties Settings Job The Select Job> Settings. button. The current defaults,all set theJobparameters desired to selected,is created, anewJob Default andthe is tool on bar the button the New Whenever AS DEFAULT SAVING THEJOBSETTINGS To STOPclick the button. Job, arunning stop WARNING and is confirmed by the following message. following the by isconfirmed and saved, areimmediately settings current The button. Default as Settings Save Click the pages settings. desired Settings the Job to the in the values Set all following: of the one Do the run Jobprocess. starts Touch the immediately From system The button. RUN clickthe ScreenInterface, Interface. Touchthe Touch the in Jobs 6.2.2Loading seeSection ScreenInterface, Screen To Touch the from aJob run To loaded. be must aJob ScreenInterface, in aJob load Laser will turn on immediately. • settingsare save d as the default. clicked,Fileor theitem >Newmenu is values, then click the Sa Job Settings are applied. To customizethe Check beam path before proceeding.before Check beampath WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS ve SettingsasDefault Running Jobs

7 -23 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Stand-Alone Jobs

.RUNNING ...... STAND-ALONE ...... JOBS...... Stand-Alone jobs can be executed on an LEC-1 device by using a Pendant, or interacting with the LEC-1 using the Remote API over Ethernet or RS-232. Additionally, WinLase LAN can be used to interact with an LEC-1 in Stand-Alone mode. This feature allows the design and debug of Stand-Alone jobs to be done completely within the WinLase LAN user interface. Stand-Alone jobs can also be run from the WinLase LAN interface in production situations as well. Behind the scenes, WinLase LAN uses the Remote API command set exposed by the LEC-1 device to enable this functionality.

To remotely run the current Job

NOTE • There must be an active connection to an LEC-1 device, and the Job to be run remotely must be assigned to that device.

1 Do one of the following: • From the Main menu, select Job > Run Remotely. • Press F9 on the keyboard. • Right-click the Job in the Laser System Viewer and select “Run Remotely...”.

2 Click the Upload button to copy the current Job to the LEC-1, load it into RAM and make it the Active Job. The Job is copied to a special folder used only for this purpose and is not stored permanently. To copy the file into permanent memory, see “Saving Stand-Alone (LEC binary) Job files” on page 5 -5.

7 -24 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en D C B A A Control JobThe Remote page C B D E F If portis HIGH - The LEC-1de • trigger if will device LEC-1 The - port isLOW If • transition from After LOW -TheLEC- -> HIGH • transition from After -TheLEC- LOW ->HIGH • Select from thefollowingTrigger mode options: Instructs the LEC-1 device to device Instructs theLEC-1 Select thisoptionto EnableonMarkavailable theFly(only on Click theGo button to Stop withthisbutton. job execution switches from HIGHtoLOW. Detection) (Level from Detection) (Edge isdetected. HIGHtoLOW Detection) (Edge from isdetected. HIGH to LOW switches from LOW to HIGH. (Level Detection) switches from (Level HIGH. to LOW run the repeatedly.Job the run initiate Jobexecution. initiate run the job in cache mode. job incache the run vice will iftheportis trigger LEC-1 devices with an Advanced license). an Advanced with devices LEC-1 1 device will trigger only when a transition triggeronlywhena will 1 device transition triggeronlywhena will 1 device the port is LOW when checked, or if the port the orif checked, when port isLOW the Running Stand-Alone Jobs HIGH when checked, or if the port orif when checked, HIGH WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS

E F 7 -25 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Running Stand-Alone Jobs

To configure Mark on the Fly parameters for the current Job

NOTE • Mark on the Fly parameters are only available when connected to an LEC-1 device with an Advanced license.

NOTE • Changes to Mark on the Fly parameters are not saved to the LEC-1 device or the Job, and are active only while the Run Remotely window is open.

• From the Run Job page, select the “Enable Mark on the Fly” option. The Mark on the Fly tab appears.

A B C D

The Mark on the Fly parameter page A The number of counts the encoder outputs for every millimeter of part movement. When the LEC-1 device is in Simulate encoder mode, this control is disabled. B Enter the actual part speed in mm/s. The system assumes a constant part speed during the marking process. When the LEC-1 device is in Encoder mode, this control is disabled. C This option will add a specified delay, in distance, between when the Start Mark signal is received and when the LEC-1 device executes the marking vectors. Because this delay is based on distance in the part movement direction, as the part speed changes, the spacing stays constant. Enter 0 to disable the distance delay. D Indicates the currently configured encoder mode of the LEC-1 device. The encoder mode cannot be changed from this tool. To change the encoder mode, see “To configure the Mark on the Fly settings” on page 4 -33.

7 -26 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To remotely runa Job stored on an LEC-1 1 E D C B A B A Control JobThe Remote page Right-click the LEC-1 device in the Laser S the in device theLEC-1 Right-click C E D G F H Select thejobtorun.When Select the locationon the If portis HIGH - The LEC-1de • trigger if will device LEC-1 The - port isLOW If • transition from After LOW -TheLEC- -> HIGH • transition from After -TheLEC- LOW ->HIGH • Select from thefollowingTrigger mode options: RAM. to loadthejobinto Instructs the LEC-1 device to device Instructs theLEC-1 Select thisoptionto Click theGo button to RAM Load thejobinto Stop withthisbutton. job execution switches from HIGHtoLOW. Detection) (Level from Detection) (Edge isdetected. HIGHtoLOW Detection) (Edge from isdetected. HIGH to LOW switches from LOW to HIGH. (Level Detection) switches from (Level HIGH. to LOW run the repeatedly.Job the run initiate Jobexecution. initiate LEC-1 tosearchLEC-1 jobs for run the job in cache mode. job incache the run job is theLoadbutton changed, b vice will iftheportis trigger ystem Viewer and select “Interactive...”. ystem Viewer “Interactive...”. select and 1 device will trigger only when a transition triggeronlywhena will 1 device transition triggeronlywhena will 1 device the port is LOW when checked, or if the port the orif checked, when port isLOW the Running Stand-Alone Jobs HIGH when checked, or if the port orif when checked, HIGH ecomes active and must beclicked ecomes activeandmust WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS

H G F 7 -27 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Controlling WinLase LAN Remotely

.CONTROLLING ...... WINL...... ASE...... LAN . . . . . REMOTELY......

THE HOST INTERFACE WinLase LAN was designed to be a full-featured laser marker user interface, with capabilities for editing, saving, opening and running “jobs” directly from the WinLase LAN interface. Although this interface is extremely powerful, it may not be desirable in all circumstances.

For this reason, WinLase LAN offers the Host Interface service. This service provides a remote program, written by the customer, the ability to take control of WinLase LAN. In addition, the Fieldbus interface provides a means for controlling WinLase LAN, and reading status back from WinLase LAN to the Master controller.

Although TCP/IP, RS-232 and Fieldbus interfaces are supported, only one may be active at a time for remote control.

Please refer to the Lanmark Controls Inc. document Remote Interface Manual for complete details on how to use this powerful interfacing technique.

RS-232 AND TCP/IP INTERFACE CONCEPTS When using the RS-232 or TCP/IP interfaces, a remote program can load jobs, dynamically change the content of marking objects, run jobs, and receive status back from WinLase LAN after every command. While the remote program has control, the WinLase LAN User Interface is locked out, preventing the operator from making any changes to the running process. Although jobs that contain Motor Control objects can be loaded, the Remote Interface does not support executing motor control objects within the job.

In operation, the external program takes control of WinLase LAN, but does not initiate the actual marking cycle. This is done through the Start Mark input on the LEC-1. Once the Start Mark input is toggled, the mark cycle begins, the mark completes, and then WinLase LAN returns to wait for the Start Mark input to toggle again.

In addition to the control commands available, there are a number of status query commands that can be used to retrieve the current status of WinLase LAN. These queries can be made even if the remote computer has not taken control of WinLase LAN.

FIELDBUS INTERFACE CONCEPTS Using the Fieldbus interface, a remote Master controller can load jobs by Index number, change the contents of two fixed memory buffers, run jobs, and receive status back from WinLase LAN after every command. While the remote Master has control, the WinLase LAN User Interface is locked out, preventing the operator from making any changes to the running process. Although jobs that contain Motor Control objects can be loaded, the Remote Interface does not support executing motor control objects within the job.

7 -28 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en marking cycle.This is done can go on totakecontrol and load In operation, the external Master initializes throughthe StartMark bit. input jobs. Once a job is loaded, the Master initiates the actual WinLase LAN with astar Controlling WinLase LANRemotely WinLaseUser Guide LAN MARKING JOBS tup sequence, and then tup sequence,

7 -29 . . . . . MARKING JOBS 7 Controlling WinLase LAN Remotely

7 -30 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en THE MARKING FIELD AND LENS ...... 8 .

Image field correction capability is provided to compensate for optical errors induced by all two-mirror laser beam systems. These optical distortions are caused by a number of factors, including the distance between each mirror, the distance between the mirrors and the image field, and the type of lens used in the laser system for focusing the laser beam. This section describes the issues encountered with flat field (f-theta) laser scanning and methods for correcting distortions inherent in this focusing technique. The issues are:

• Understanding and correcting Induced Field Distortions • Correcting for Mechanical Alignment Tolerances by calibrating the marking field

.UNDERSTANDING ...... FIELD...... DISTORTIONS ...... Image field distortions are comprised primarily of: • Mirror induced distortions • F-theta Objective induced distortions The following figure illustrates the geometrical relationship between the galvos, mirrors and work surface.

X galvo

Y galvo

Beam

y x

Projection system layout

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 8 -1 THE MARKING FIELD AND LENS 8 Understanding Field Distortions

MIRROR INDUCED DISTORTION Projection of a laser beam via an X-Y mirror set controlled by galvanometers induces distortion in the X axis proportional to the tangent of the angle of the Y axis mirror and the distance from the focal plane to the center of the Y axis mirror. This distortion is also known as "pincushion" distortion.

Pincushion distortion caused by X-Y mirror set

F-THETA OBJECTIVE INDUCED DISTORTION The addition of an F-theta objective in the laser field provides direct proportionality between the scan angle and the distance in the image field, as well as ensures that the focus lies on a flat surface. F-theta objective lenses, like all optical lenses, are not perfect and induce their own projection field distortions. This distortion, illustrated in the following figure, is called “barrel” distortion for what it does to a square image. Many projection lens vendors will provide these model coefficients, or measurement data from which these coefficients can be derived. For many applications, however, this distortion is negligible.

Barrel distortion caused by F-theta lens

8 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en digital commandoutputs. and th applied totheidealpoint, each grid point. This process, This gridpoint. each fouraveraged pointsareat these proportionally cases,however, acustomcorrection table must WinLaseon page LAN” the LEC-1”onpage to the PC file from the lens correction filefrom any WinLaselens correctionfilec a LANprovides the library oflens correctionfiles,or are available from scan themanufacturer. head ar files correction ofthese Most manufacture. Most scanheadmanufacturerscorre provide TABLES USING CORRECTION accesses the four gridpointsth position of themirrors along thepath.Itcompar the micro-vectoringprocessDuring ateachupda pointprojected wouldfallonto idealcommand forthat position one each for the X, Y andZ axes. The component projection rangeof the system.Eachgrid el el 65x65tables. Correctiontables a represent This distortionisautomatical CompositeField Image Distortion fieldsimilarfollowing shown inthe tothatfigure: described previ The twodistortioncomponents DISTORTION CORRECTION

-22 ly compensated for by the LEC-1 through the use of correction ly compensated forbytheLEC-1throughuse of called bi-linear inte for more information on using correction tables. In some for moreinformation onusingcorrectiontables.In at immediately surround the calc at immediatelysurround the a “perfect” grid, i.e. the the i.e. grid, “perfect” a point, would alter the galvopositi point, wouldalter e result is then sent to the to is thensent e result major scanheadvendors. See

-19 THE MARKING FIELD ANDLENS ement contains threecorrection components: ction tables forspecificscan headsthey and ement grid covering the full addressable the full ement gridcovering e eitheralready provided by WinLase LANin onversiontheof feature,which allows use becreatedfrom sc ouslycombine tocreateadistorted image depending on how close the ideal point isto the ideal close depending onhow es thisvalue tothe correction table gridand te interval, the LEC-1 calculates the ideal LEC-1 calculates the interval, the te rpolation, produces a “Toadd anewLensCorrection fileto s represent anoffset thatifaddedtoan UnderstandingDistortions Field point wouldbe“corrected”. system D/A convertersand serial ulated point.Thecorrections “To copy aLens Correction WinLaseUser Guide LAN ons suchthatthe resulting an head design data. correction that is

8 -3 . . . . . THE MARKING FIELD AND LENS 8 Understanding Field Distortions

WinLase LAN provides the capability to create a new table “from scratch” using only the design data of the target scan head.

To create a new Lens Correction file using scan head design data 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Click on any installed lens in the tree view. 4 Click the Change button. The Select Correction File window appears.

5 Click the Install New File button. The Install New Correction File Wizard appears.

NOTE • The Install New File button will be disabled if a hardlock license key is not detected

6 Click the Next button to start the Wizard. The Correction File page appears.

7 Select the “Create new file” option and enter a filename (without extension) for the new correction file.

8 Click Next. The Lens Correction File Description page appears.

9 Enter a descriptive name for the new lens. This is the name that appears in the available lens list. Note that the name is truncated to 25 characters in length. 10 Click Next. The Lens Focus Type page appears. WinLase LAN can create correction tables only for f-theta lens systems, so f-theta is pre-selected.

8 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 15 14 13 12 11 Click Next. The Scan head Clear Aperture page ClearAperture head Scan appears. The Click Next. size. field the desired Enter considerations. optical for account to bespecified sizecan field asmaller Ifdesired, lens. f-theta the of length focal the and angle maximum attained galvanometer the given be can that size field maximum the theoretical displays and calculates wizard The Sizepage Field Maximum appears. The Click Next. scanhead. the with used to be lens system the of length focal the rotate Enter will mirror deflection. the forfullfield that angle optical maximum the Enter Click Next. The Scan Head Parameters page Parameters Head Scan The Click Next. appears. THE MARKING FIELD ANDLENS UnderstandingDistortions Field WinLaseUser Guide LAN

8 -5 . . . . . THE MARKING FIELD AND LENS 8 Understanding Field Distortions

16 Enter the clear aperture of the Scan Head. This value is the maximum beam diameter that can be passed through the scan head without optical clipping.

17 Click the Next button. The final page appears confirming the changes. Click the Done button to close the Wizard.

To add a Lens Correction file supplied by a scan head vendor to WinLase LAN 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears. 3 Click on any installed lens in the tree view.

4 Click the Change button. The Select Correction File window appears.

5 Click the Install New File button. The Install New Correction File Wizard appears.

NOTE • The Install New File button will be disabled if a hardlock license key is not detected

6 Click the Next button to start the Wizard. The Correction File page appears.

7 Select the “Existing file” option and then click the the browse button. The Locate Correction file window opens. Select the correction file to be added to the list. The file name is entered in the file name edit box. If the lens already exists, a message similar to the following will appear:

8 Click Next. The Lens Correction File Description page appears.

11 Select the “f-theta” option. Most new lenses will be of the f-theta variety. If the lens system has an automatic z-axis, select “3-axis”.

12 Click Next. The Calibration Factor page appears.

13 Enter the calibration factor for the lens. This value is important, as it sets the scaling for all dimensions throughout WinLase LAN. The calibration factor is available from the

8 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 18 17 16 15 14 button to close the Wizard. the close to button Done Clickthe changes. the page final The confirming appears button. Next Click the manufacturer. Head the Scan from isavailable value This ScanHead. the of aperture the clear Enter page ClearAperture head Scan appears. The Click Next. (mm). units the Note millimeters arealwaysin added. being thelens of length the focal Enter page Length Focal appears. The Click Next. regarding GridCorrectiontools. le and mechanical current forthe calibrated le standardCorrection Programchangesthe The GridCorrection algorithm allows calibrati Lanmarkfrom Controls Inc. toaccomplish this task. aforementionedThe met errors. needed tomanipulate the values in the standa situations, however,signif errors are where the Usually, theseerrors arecanbe sosmallthey The galvanometerscanners, • All lenses differ slightlydueto manufact • an “ideal lens” and causedtwo-mirrorby the system is compensate the informationnecessaryfor scanningwithin includedcorrection files withWinLaseAll L USING GRIDCORRECTION bits/millimeter oftheUnits regardless ofWinLase (mm) setting LAN. lens assembly. and Head Scan the of manufacturer units the that Note arealwaysin “ideal lens”. positions resulting from ma positions resultingfrom ignores two phenomena:ignores two nufacturing tolerances. hodis calledGridprogramis available Correction,and a which rotate the mirrors,ha which rotate THE MARKING FIELD ANDLENS ns combination. Please consult the factoryns combination. Pleaseconsult ns correction file, producing anewone, uring tolerances,causin AN or supplied by scan head vendors have all ignoredinmostapplications. There are some rd lenscorrection file, compensating for the a flat working area, a ng a field at 9, 25, or 81 points.The Grid 9, 25,or81 ng afieldat icant, and need tobe icant, and d. However, comp d. this UnderstandingDistortions Field ve a non-linearity in their in ve anon-linearity WinLaseUser Guide LAN corrected. A method is method corrected.A nd the fielddistortion g adistortionfrom the ensation is based on

8 -7 . . . . . THE MARKING FIELD AND LENS 8 Correcting for Mechanical Alignment Tolerances

CORRECTING FOR MECHANICAL ALIGNMENT .TOLERANCES ...... Although inherent distortions in the lens can be corrected with a lens correction file, errors or tolerances in the mechanical fixturing of the Scan Head to its mounting surface may produce additional scanning errors. In order to correct for these mechanical alignment errors, WinLase LAN provides the following features in the Lens Calibration Wizard:

• Adjustment of X and Y position of scan field.

• Adjustment of X and Y scale of scan field. • Adjustment of Rotation of the scan field. WinLase LAN maintains separate calibrations for each unique lens correction file. When switching between correction tables, the appropriate calibrations are applied. If calibrations have been applied to a correction table, WinLase LAN indicates this by prepending ‘(*)’ to the lens correction table name in the Hardware manager.

WinLase LAN indicating a calibrated file

To adjust the X and Y Field Scaling • WinLase LAN must have an active connection to an LEC-1 device 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. The System Preferences window appears.

2 Click on the Hardware Tab. The Hardware configuration page appears. 3 From the Hardware tree view, highlight the lens underneath the LEC-1 being adjusted. If the lens is not visible, click on the + next to the LEC-1, then select the lens.

4 Click the Calibrate button. The confirmation window appears to verify the selection.

5 Click OK. The Calibration Wizard appears.

6 Click the Next button to start the Calibration Wizard. The Scale marking field page appears. 7 In the Scale Marking field page, select the “Yes” option.

8 Click the Next button. The Place your sample page appears.

9 Follow the on screen instructions for placing the marking sample.

8 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To adjust the Xand YField Offset 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 10 11 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 • If Yes is selected, click the Next button until the WizardIf Yes the completes. until button Next clickthe isselected, option. “No” the select Verify page, “Yes” calibration the the select agree, measurements not the do If option. stated value the the measurementswith on sample agree test marked newly If the Verify The button. Next pageClick the calibration the appears. the laser. with ismarked sample The button. sample Marktest the Click field. marking the of center the in sample Place aclean page newsample Remark The appears. button. Next Click the boxes. edit measurements the appropriate inthe Yaxes.Enter Xand the orientation the of noting device, measuring precision a with sample test the Measure results Measurethe The page button. Next Click the appears. pattern Marktest The page button. Next Click the appears. Click theMarktestpattern sampl The button. WinLase LAN must have an active connection to an LEC-1 device LEC-1 an to connection anactive have must LAN WinLase WARNING WARNING select the lens. the select then Head, Scan the to + next the on click visible, is not lens the If adjusted. being Head Scan fileattached view, the Cardtree to correction Scan lens the the From highlight Tab. Hardware the Click on page Hardwareconfiguration appears. The appears. bar,window menu Preferences the From System The > Preferences. selectSystem Click the Next until the Wizard the completes. until Next Click the boxes. edit appropriate inthe field marking the offset to the amount Enter offsetsfield Enter pageThe appears. page, field Marking “Yes” clickthe Offset button. In the Next clickthe then and option, pagefield marking appears. Offset the until button Next Click the Wizardappears. Calibration Click OK.The selection. the verify to appears window confirmation The button. Calibrate Click the • Laser will turn on when the Mark te Mark the when on turn will Laser • te Mark the when on turn will Laser • the beampath before proceeding. the beampath before proceeding. Correcting forMechanica THE MARKING FIELD ANDLENS e will mark withthetestpatterne willmark square. st pattern buttonis st pattern buttonis WinLaseUser Guide LAN l Alignment Tolerances clicked. Check clicked. Check

8 -9 . . . . . THE MARKING FIELD AND LENS 8 Correcting for Mechanical Alignment Tolerances

To adjust the Scan Field Rotation 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences. The System Preferences window appears. 2 Click on the Hardware Tab. The Hardware configuration page appears.

3 From the Hardware tree view, highlight the lens correction file attached to the LEC-1 being adjusted. If the lens is not visible, click on the + next to the LEC-1, then select the lens.

4 Click the Calibrate button. The confirmation window appears to verify the selection. 5 Click OK. The Calibration Wizard appears.

6 Click the Next button until the Rotate marking field page appears.

7 In the Rotate field page, click the “Yes” option, and then click the Next button. The Mark rotation test sample page appears.

8 To verify the settings, click the Mark test pattern button. Repeat the process until the marking field is correctly aligned. 9 Click the Next button until the Wizard completes.

To manually enter calibration values • WinLase LAN must have an active connection to an LEC-1 device 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences. The System Preferences window appears. 2 Click on the Hardware Tab. The Hardware configuration page appears.

3 From the Scan Card tree view, highlight the lens correction file attached to the Scan Head being adjusted. If the lens is not visible, click on the + next to the Scan Head, then select the lens.

4 Click the Calibrate button. The confirmation window appears to verify the selection. 5 Click OK. The Calibration Wizard appears.

6 Click the Next button until the Calibration Method page appears.

8 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 7 A The Analog servopage Select E D C B F Amount to change the X axis scaling, scaling, axis X the change to Amount Amount torotateAmount theentire field, indegrees. A theYaxis. offset to Amount the tooffset X axis. Amount scaling, the Y axis tochange Amount Click this buttontorestoreClick the Manually and click Next. The Enter Calibration Data Calibration Enter The page clickNext. and appears. calibrations tofactory defaults. calibrations in percent.Maximum20.00%.range is± in percent.in ± 20.00%. Maximumrangeis Correcting forMechanica THE MARKING FIELD ANDLENS positive value will rotatepositive valuewill th WinLase UserGuide LAN l Alignment Tolerances e fieldcounter-clockwise. E D C B A F

8 -11 . . . . . THE MARKING FIELD AND LENS 8 Correcting for Mechanical Alignment Tolerances

8 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en CONNECTING TO LASERS ...... 9 .

The LEC-1 provides very flexible laser control capability that is synchronized with galvo motion control. Six dedicated TTL compatible signals are provided at all times whose timing relationships are defined by the Laser Driver file. Not all signals may be required for a given customer laser configuration. An integrator need only select an appropriate subset of these signals, and configure them via theWinLase LAN laser configuration Wizard with appropriate timing parameters.

.WORKING ...... WITH...... THE...... LASER ...... DRIVER...... WIZARD ...... When modifying an existing Laser Driver, or to create a new one, WinLase LAN provides a Laser Driver Wizard.

To configure an existing Laser Driver file 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears. 3 Click on the laser in the tree view to be configured.

4 Click the Configure button. The Configure Laser Driver File confirmation window appears, verifying the request to change the current laser driver.

5 Refer to the sections that follow for details on configuring specific laser signals.

To add a new Laser Driver file 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences. 2 Click on the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Click on any laser in the tree view.

4 Click the Change button. The Select Laser Driver window appears.

5 Click the Install New Laser button. The Laser Configuration Wizard appears.

NOTE • The Install New Laser button will not be available if a hard lock license key is not detected

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 9 -1 CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

6 Click the Next button to start the Laser Configuration Wizard. The Laser Description page appears.

7 Enter a unique descriptive name in the edit box. This name will appear in the list of available laser drivers. 8 Refer to the sections that follow for details on configuring specific laser signals.

UNDERSTANDING THE LASER CONTROL SIGNALS WinLase LAN uses a Laser Driver file, which controls the timing relationship between all of the laser control signals on the LEC-1. WinLase LAN ships with several pre-defined Laser Driver files and new Laser Driver files can be created as well.

TIMING DIAGRAM The LEC-1 provides the following laser control signals:

• Laser Modulation 1 - Provides a variable frequency and pulse width signal. • Laser Modulation 2 - Provides a variable frequency and pulse width signal that is phase shifted 180 degrees from Laser Modulation 1.

• Laser On 1 - Provides a gate signal that switches HIGH at the start of a marking vector, and then LOW at the end of the marking vector.

• Laser FPK- Provides a pulse that is triggered at the beginning of a marking vector to provide a means of suppressing the first pulses on certain laser types.

• Laser Enable - Switched HIGH before a marking vector starts, and then switched LOW after a timeout has expired. This signal is used to allow certain lasers to enable their control circuitry.

9 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Digital laser signal laser Digital The following diagramillustrates the digital la • • • one another. Servo position Modulation 1 Modulation Laser1 On Laser FPK Laser can be used to control thepower.can beusedtocontrol laser AnalogPower Laser Power Data Laser 0 to7 Visible Pointer used to controlthe laser pow command Stand-by PW Stand-by Enable Stand-by PP Stand-by Laser Laser Micro-vector start timing relationships timing - Provides a dedicated signal Provides adedicated - FPK Position (±), - shown - (±), Laser Enable Delay Laser Modulation - An analog signal, witha maximum range of 0 - 10 VDC,which - An 8-bit (oroptionally7-bit - An Delay er,control. or forwaveform Micro-vectoring in process FPK length (±),shown + Laser On Delay ser control signals and Laser Off Delay to control a guide laser a tocontrol Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS Active PW Active PP with latch) signal which can be with latch)signalwhich WinLaseUser Guide LAN their relationshipto truncated be may Pulse Laser Enable timeout

9 -3 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

CONFIGURING THE LASER POWER CONTROL SIGNALS Generally speaking, there are two ways in which the output power of a laser is controlled: • Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control, where the power of the laser is controlled by a single laser modulation signal. The frequency and pulse width of the drive signal is variable, and the Duty Cycle of the signal controls the power of the laser. CO2 lasers are typical of the PWM type. The following partial screen shot of an Object Profile illustrates the Laser power and the Frequency parameters. When either the Laser power value, or the Frequency value is changed, the Pulse Width (which is not shown) is calculated automatically. For lasers that require a limited range of duty cycles, the maximum and minimum Duty Cycle can be configured in the Laser Driver file.

The Laser power and Frequency fields control power in a PWM laser

• Discrete control, where individual signals for power (analog or digital), laser gate and modulation may all be required to control different aspects of the lasers output. Additional signals, such as first pulse suppression, and an enable signal may be required as well. When using this type of control, WinLase LAN offers a Power Change Delay, which automatically compensates for the time it takes the laser to change from one power setting to the next. The following partial screen shot of an Object Profile illustrates the Laser power, Frequency and Pulse width parameters. The Laser Power parameter controls both the Laser Power Analog signal and the 8-bit Digital power signals. The Frequency and Pulse width signals control the Laser Modulation 1 signal.

Laser power is controlled independently of Frequency and Pulse width in a Discrete input laser

9 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the Laser PowerType 2 1 B A what Selecting type oflaser to configure Wizard. the open to how on Press the Next button until the “Laser Type”“Laser the until button Next Press the page appears. DriverWizard. See the Laser Open Configure LaserDriverforaDi the Configure typelaser LaserDriverforaPWM the scretecontrol power typelaser “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS WinLaseUser Guide LAN B A for details for

9 -5 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

To select analog or digital power control

NOTE • These settings only apply to lasers with discrete laser power control.

1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard. 2 Press the Next button until the “Power control interface” page appears.

A B

Selecting analog or digital power control A The laser requires an analog signal to control the power B The laser requires a digital signal to control the laser power C In some lasers, both the analog and digital outputs are controlled separately. Select this option to have independent control over the analog and digital outputs

9 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en analogthe drivevoltagerangeTo configure 2 1 B A Configuring theanalogvoltagedrive range Wizard. the open to how on NOTE Press the Next button until the “Analog drivevoltage”“Analog page the until appears. button Next Press the DriverWizard. See the Laser Open WinLase theanalog 0%, to isset LAN inputrequired thevoltage Specify mini achieve to WinLase theana 100%, to isset LAN inputrequired thevoltage Specify maxi to achieve • These These settings only apply ifthe la • the laser power. laser the log output will beatthislevel. log output “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with output will be atthislevel. be output will mum laserpower.power fieldin Laser Whenany mum laserpower.Laser powerfield in any When Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS ser uses ananalog WinLaseUser Guide LAN input to control A B for details for

9 -7 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

To configure the digital (8-bit) control range

NOTE • These settings only apply if the laser uses an 8-bit digital input to control the laser power.

1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard. 2 Press the Next button until the “Digital power control range” page appears.

Configuring the digital power control range A Specify the 8-bit value required to achieve maximum laser power. When any Laser power field in WinLase LAN is set to 100%, the 8-bit Laser Power Data outputs will be at this level. B Specify the 8-bit value required to achieve minimum laser power. When any Laser power field in WinLase LAN is set to 0%, the 8-bit Laser Power Data outputs will be at this level. C Specify the 8-bit value that the Laser Power Data outputs will be set to when the LEC-1 device powers up. D Some lasers require a signal to latch the Laser Power Data bits. Selecting this option will configure the LSB (Laser Power Data 1) to produce a pulse (LOW-HIGH-LOW) whenever the power has changed.

9 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To settheDutyCyclerange 2 1 B A cycle Configuring theduty Wizard. the open to how on NOTE Press the Next button until the “Modulation Duty cycle” page cycle” Duty appears. “Modulation the until button Next Press the DriverWizard. See the Laser Open LAN, this minimum will be validated. minimum willbe thisLAN, on thatisallowed dutycycle minimum the Specify WinLasewill bevalidated. ischanged,thismaximum LAN th duty cycle themaximum Specify • These settings only apply settings These • range for PWM laser types laser range forPWM at is allowed on the laser.on the at isallowed “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with if the laser is a PWM type. the laser. inWinLase WhenanyLaserpower field Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS When any Laser power field in any Laserpower When WinLaseUser Guide LAN A B for details for

9 -9 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

Overriding the power settings with the laser controller

NOTE • These settings only apply if the laser uses an 8-bit digital input to control the laser power.

1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard. 2 Press the Next button until the “Manual laser power control” page appears.

Configuring the manual override feature A To use a panel control to manually control the laser power, select the Yes option.

9 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the Power Change Delay 2 1 A Configuring thepower changedelay Wizard. the open to how on NOTE Press the Next button until the “Power Change Delay”page“Power Change the appears. until button Next Press the DriverWizard. See the Laser Open any markingany vectors are processed. the new power value. This delay cha Laserpower the When • This This setting only appliestolasers • nges during marking, nges during is insertedafterthe Laser powe “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with a delay can thelaserbe toallow to specified reach Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS with discrete la r command has changed, but before WinLase UserGuide LAN ser powercontrol. A for details for

9 -11 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

To control how the laser power is displayed in WinLase LAN

NOTE • This setting only applies to lasers with discrete laser power control.

1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard. 2 Press the Next button until the “Laser power display units” page appears.

A B

Configuring the power display units A The Laser power field in the Object Profile is displayed as a percentage of total available power. B The Laser power field in the Object Profile is displayed in watts.

9 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en • • The Laser types. laser most pulseTwoand widthcanbecontrolled. Hard The LaserModulationsignal pr SIGNAL MODULATION THELASER CONFIGURING page if the laser doesnotsupportthem. following screen shot.Either or ON. The Frequency and Pulse width are configured Active Stand-By Driver file. OFF. is laser the when stream width Sta The - Provides aprogrammable frequency and pul - Also known as aticklesignal.Provi Modulation signal has two modes: two Modulation signalhas ovides aprogrammable pulse stream where both frequency both of these fields can be fields bothofthese ware frequency ranges are availabletosuitware frequency ranges nd-By settings are configured in the Laser configured inthe nd-By settingsare Working Wizard Driver Laser with the des aprogrammable frequency and pulse CONNECTING TO LASERS inthe ObjectProfile, asshownin the se width streamwhentheis se laser hidden in the Object Profile Object hidden in the WinLaseUser Guide LAN

9 -13 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

To select the Hardware frequency range 1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard. 2 Press the Next button until the “Hardware Frequency Range” page appears.

A B

Setting the LEC-1 hardware frequency range A Configure the LEC-1 device to output a frequency range of 20 Hz to 900 kHz. The pulse width resolution will be 1 µs in this mode, and all laser signal parameters will have their full range available. B Configure the LEC-1 device to output a frequency range of 200 Hz to 5 MHz. The pulse width resolution will be 100 ns in this mode, but reduces the range of the laser signal parameters by a factor of 10.

9 -14 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To configure the polarity of the Laser Modulation signal 2 1 B A Configuring thepolarity Wizard. the open to how on Press the Next button until the “Laser Modulation delay and polarity” page polarity” appears. delay and Modulation “Laser the until button Next Press the DriverWizard. See the Laser Open When set to Low Active, the La the toLowActive, set When ON. When set to High Active, the La the toHighActive, set When ser Modulation output switches to Modulation outputswitches ser ser Modulation ser Modulation to output switches “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS TTL GND when the laser is ON. laser the when TTLGND TTL when +5VDC the laser is WinLaseUser Guide LAN B A for details for

9 -15 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

To show or hide the Frequency and Pulse width fields 1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard. 2 Press the Next button until the “Frequency and Pulse Width control” page appears.

Controlling the visibility of the frequency and pulse width fields A Select Yes to show the Frequency field in the Object Profile, select No to hide the field. B Select Yes to show the Pulse width field in the Object Profile, select No to hide the field.

The Pulse width field is hidden

The Pulse width field is available

9 -16 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To set the allowable range of frequencies 2 1 A Controlling thefrequency range Wizard. the open to how on Press the Next button until the “Laser Modulation Frequency Range” page Range” appears. Frequency Modulation “Laser the until button Next Press the DriverWizard. See the Laser Open B WinLase LANischanged, thisvalu frequency themaximum Specify that WinLase LANischanged, thisvalu frequencySpecify theminimum thatcanbe usedto e is used to validate the change. the e isusedtovalidate e is used to validate the change. the e isusedtovalidate can be used to controltocan beused thelaser.When anyFrequency in field “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with control thelaser. Frequency Whenany in field Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS WinLaseUser Guide LAN B A for details for

9 -17 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

To set the allowable range of pulse widths 1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard. 2 Press the Next button until the “Pulse Width Range” page appears.

Controlling the pulse width range A Specify the maximum pulse width that can be used to control the laser. When any Pulse width field in WinLase LAN is changed, this value is used to validate the change. B Specify the minimum pulse width that can be used to control the laser. When any Pulse width field in WinLase LAN is changed, this value is used to validate the change.

9 -18 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To set the Stand-by frequency and pulse width 2 1 C B A The Standby signal page Wizard. the open to how on Press the Next button until the “Standby the until (Tickle) page button signal” Next Press the appears. DriverWizard. See the Laser Open Specify thefrequencySpecify oftheStand-Bypulse stream. Specify thepulse widthStand-By ofthe stream. pulse Select Yesenableto aStand-By pulsestream.Select Notodisable. “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with Working Wizard Driver Laser with the CONNECTING TO LASERS WinLaseUser Guide LAN B A C for details for

9 -19 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

CONFIGURING THE LASER ON SIGNAL The Laser On (Gate) signal is asserted when the laser in ON.

To configure the polarity of the Laser On (Gate) signal 1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard.

2 Press the Next button until the “Laser Modulation delay and polarity” page appears.

A B

Configuring the polarity A When set to High Active, the Laser On (Gate) output switches to TTL +5VDC when the laser is ON. B When set to Low Active, the Laser On (Gate) output switches to TTL GND when the laser is ON.

9 -20 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To modify Laser Enablesignal settings 2 1 B A The LaserEnable signal page Wizard. the open to how on is de-assertedafteraprogram and The Laser Enable signal is asserted a programmable time beforethe LaserOn (Gate)signal, SIGNAL ENABLE THELASER CONFIGURING Press the Next button until the “Laser Enable signal” page signal” Enable “Laser appears. the until button Next Press the DriverWizard. See the Laser Open C D Specify the Enable Timeout. theEnable Specify theLaser Modula After signal. Specify theamount oftimebefore theLaserMo When set When set to High theLaserEnable Active, the Laser Enable Timeout,the LaserEnable theLase When set When set to Enable Low theLaser Active, mable period of laser inactivity.laser mable period of r Enable signal isturned OFF. “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with output switches to TTL GND when ON. GND output switches toTTL output switches to TTL +5VDCwhenON. outputswitchestoTTL dulation 1 signal to turn ON the Laser Enable dulation 1signaltoturnONtheLaser Working Wizard Driver Laser with the tionhas 1signal beenin CONNECTING TO LASERS WinLaseUser Guide LAN active forlongerthan active A D C B for details for

9 -21 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Working with the Laser Driver Wizard

CONFIGURING THE FIRST PULSE KILLER SIGNAL

To modify Laser FPK (First Pulse Killer) signal settings

NOTE • These settings only apply to lasers with discrete laser power control.

1 Open the Laser Driver Wizard. See “Working with the Laser Driver Wizard” for details on how to open the Wizard.

2 Press the Next button until the “First Pulse Suppression signal” page appears.

C D

The FPK signal page A Specify the start position of the FPK signal. The start position of the FPK signal is measured from the leading edge of the Laser On (Gate) signal. For the FPK signal to start before the Laser On (Gate) signal, use a negative value. B Specify the pulse width of the FPK signal. C When set to High Active, the Laser FPK output switches to TTL +5VDC when ON. D When set to Low Active, the Laser FPK output switches to TTL GND when ON.

9 -22 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To enable theVisiblePointeroption 2 1 A Enabling theVisibleoption Pointer Wizard. the open to how on Right: PreviewMark menuitemavailable Left: VisibleHardware the item in Pointer viewer WinLase LAN supports the integration of avisi CONTROL POINTER VISIBLE ENABLING aligning object markingtothe actual part. WinLasefeatures fo LANprovides ...... POINTER AVISIBLE USING Press the Next button until the “Visible page the pointer” until appears. button Next Press the DriverWizard. See the Laser Open enables the Visible Pointer controls in WinLase LAN. Guide beam).The Visible Pointer optionis turnedinthe on Laserfile, Driver then which Select Yesenable theVisibleto Pointercontrols r controllingavisible(Guide “Working with the Laser DriverWizard”“Working Laser the with in the Object context menu popup menu context in theObject inWinLasethem. No todisable select LAN, ble pointerlaser (some CONNECTING TO LASERS WinLaseUser Guide LAN Using a Visible Pointer beam) laser to times referred toas a A A for details for assist in

9 -23 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Using a Visible Pointer

CALIBRATING THE VISIBLE POINTER Because of the difference in the wavelengths between the Visible Pointer laser and the marking laser, the Visible Pointer beam will not always indicate the true position of the marking beam. WinLase LAN provides a calibration routine to align the Visible Pointer laser with the marking laser. The Laser Driver file must have the Visible Pointer option enabled.

To calibrate the Visible Pointer 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. 2 Click the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Select the Visible pointer item in the Hardware list. The Calibrate button becomes enabled.

4 Click the Calibrate button. The Visible Pointer Calibration Wizard appears.

5 Click the Next button to start the Wizard. The Place your sample page appears. 6 Place a marking sample in the marking area and click the Next button. The Mark test pattern page appears.

WARNING • Laser will turn on when the Mark test pattern button is clicked. Check the beam path before proceeding.

7 The test pattern is a square centered in the field. The size of the test square can be set with the Test pattern size value. Enter a value, or accept the default. 8 Click the Mark test pattern button to mark the sample. After the sample is marked, click the Next button. The Align visible pointer page appears.

9 -24 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en • Wizard completes. Wizard the until button Next clickthe lasermark, the with correctly isaligned beam pointer After lasermark. the of visible top the on exactly itlies until beam pointer visible the move buttons, arrow size Object the and arrowbuttons position Object the Using CONNECTING TO LASERS WinLaseUser Guide LAN Using a Visible Pointer

9 -25 . . . . . CONNECTING TO LASERS 9 Laser Diagnostics

.LASER ...... DIAGNOSTICS...... WinLase LAN provides a tool window to turn the laser on and off from the user interface. Scan Head beam position can be selected, laser parameters can be set, and the laser manually fired, for example, in alignment operations.

To use the Laser Diagnostics Tool 1 From the Main menu, select Tools > Laser Diagnostics. The Laser Diagnostics window appears.

B C D

E F G

The Laser Diagnostics window A The X and Y coordinates of the beam position in the current units. B The power at which the laser will be set when the Fire button is pressed. C The frequency of the laser modulation signal, in kHz. D The pulse width of the laser modulation signal, in µs. E On some laser types, the laser power can be controlled from the front panel of the laser controller F Turns the laser ON immediately. G Turns the laser OFF immediately. The following operations also stop the laser: • Clicking the Done button • Pressing the ESC key on the keyboard

9 -26 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en MOTION CONFIGURATION ...... 10 .

Marking systems are often required to control one or more motors or actuators to execute complex production sequences. Typical uses of motion in a laser marking environment are:

• Adjust XY table to implement step and repeat marking or locate parts with respect to the marker lens.

• Adjust rotary axis to locate parts with respect to the marker lens • Adjust height of marker head to pre-programmed static positions to accommodate marking surfaces at different heights above the tooling plane.

• Rotate a circular cylindrical part while marking to ensure mark completely wraps around part with no distortion or areas out of focus. This feature can be used with a basic 1 to 1 gearing, or more advanced implementations which includes a stage with gearing and index (home) sensor.

WinLase LAN provides two methods for motion control: • Using Intelligent motion motors with integrated controller/drivers • Using a Prodex OMS dedicated motion controller card that installs in the PC. Both solutions cannot be used simultaneously. If WinLase LAN detects an OMS card, it will disable the Intelligent motion solution. Likewise, if no OMS card is detected, the Intelligent motion solution will be available.

.INTELLIGENT ...... MO . . . TION...... CONTROL ...... Using a supported intelligent motion solution, WinLase LAN allows the user to control up to 32 individual motion axes, with any combination of linear, rotary and XY motion devices. The intelligent motion devices are characterized by their ability to daisy chain multiple devices connected to a single RS-232 COM port. The solution consists of two major components - WinLase LAN, which is responsible for issuing serial commands to the individual motors, the motors themselves with integrated serial communication hardware, encoders, cabling and sensor inputs, and the motor power supply. The motors selected are from the Schneider Electric MDrivePlus family, and communication between motors and WinLase LAN is conducted using the MDrivePlus communication protocol. WinLase LAN supports the concept of Motion Configurations, where combinations of different motion axes are saved in a configuration file.

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 10 -1 MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

QUICK START GUIDE In general, use the following steps to set up your motion hardware: • Connect the motion hardware to the LEC-1 device using the appropriate cabling. See “Connecting the Motion Hardware”. • Create a new Motion Configuration in WinLase LAN. In a Motion Configuration, you add individual motion axes, which are then made available to WinLase LAN when programming motion Automation objects. See “Working with Motion Configurations”. • Program each individual axis contained in the Motion Configuration. See “Programming a motion axis”. • Configure the individual axis parameters, such as accelerations and speeds, homing and limit parameters, etc. within the Motion Configuration to adapt the axis to the specific hardware. See “Configuring the Axis Types”. • Test the configuration using the Motion Manager. See “Motion Manager” on page 3 -16. • Add motion based Automation objects to a job to automate the use of the Motion Configuration. See “Linear Motion” on page 6 -95.

CONNECTING THE MOTION HARDWARE In most applications, the motion hardware will be connected through the appropriate cabling to one of the available RS-232 COM ports on the LEC-1 device. Since some motion hardware uses RS-485 communication, it may be necessary to provide an adapter between the LEC-1 device and the motion hardware. Please refer to the documentation supplied with the motion hardware for instructions on proper cabling, etc. The communications settings for the LEC-1 COM port can be configured for proper communication with the motion hardware.

10 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en LEC-1 COMport theTo configure 3 2 1 B A each motiondevice with aunique name. device. Part of the process needs tohaveauniquenamesothatWinLase Additionally,in since so particular hardwaresetup Similar tothelaserconfiguration andlens WORKING WITHMOTION CONFIGURATIONS B A The LEC-1COM Ports settingspage page Click the COM Ports COM Click the tab.COM portsThe page appears. Settings. Viewer, System select Laser and In the device, LEC-1 connected the on right-click See configure. device to the LEC-1 to aconnection Create Configurethe port speed(default =9600). control. motion for Configuredevice porttouseontheLEC-1 COM which

-6 . telligent motiondevice of creatinganewmotionconf WinLasecan properlyin LAN files, a Motion Confi Motion a files, s communicate on a common bus,eachdevice LAN canidentifyandse MOTION CONFIGURATION iguration involves programming teract with the hardware. the hardware. with teract Intelligent motioncontrol “Making a Connection” on on Connection” a “Making WinLaseUser Guide LAN guration describesthe nd instructions tothe

10 -3 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

To create a new Motion Configuration 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. 2 Click the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Select a current Motion Configuration, either under the “Offline Configuration”, or under an LEC-1 device.

4 Click the Change button. The Select Motion Configuration dialog appears.

5 Click the Install New Motion... button. The Motion Configuration dialog appears. See Adding an axis type.

10 -4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Motionan existingTo modify Configuration 4 3 2 1 motion hardwaredevice is av specific motiondevice. Adding a for details on configuri Se Motion Configuration. type inthe motion Automationobj motion example, touseaLinear Left: A Linear motion typeasit motion Linear Left: A When amotionMotion Config typeaddedtoa is THEMOTIONTYPES UNDERSTANDING Configuration” a Motion to type Motion Click the Configure button. The Motion Configuration dialog appears. See appears. dialog Configuration Motion The button. Configure Click the device. anLEC-1 under modify to Configuration the Motion Select tab. Hardware Click the page Hardware The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From Right: The same motion type is now availa ng motionAutomationobjects. appears intheMotio appears ailable foruseinacorresp ailable motion type to the list tells WinLase LANthat a particular ble inaLinear Automation motion object . e Linear Motion,Rotary Motion or XY Motion n Configuration ect, there must be at least one Linear uration, alogical conne MOTION CONFIGURATION onding Automationobject.For Intelligent motioncontrol WinLaseUser Guide LAN ctionis made toa “To a add

10 -5 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

Left: Only a Linear motion type available in the Motion Configuration Right: No Rotary motion type available in a Rotary motion Automation object

To add a Motion type to a Motion Configuration 1 From the Motion Configuration tool, select a Motion type from the Available Motion types list.

2 Click the Add button. The Motion type is added to the Motion Configuration.

To remove an Motion type from a Motion Configuration 1 From the Motion Configuration tool, select a Motion type in the Current Configuration list.

2 Click the Remove button. The Motion type is removed from the Current configuration.

CONFIGURING AXIS PARAMETERS Each Motion type in the Motion Configuration must be logically linked to an actual hardware device. This linking is done by giving the each motion axis within the Motion type a unique name, and linking it to a specific hardware driver type.

PROGRAMMING A MOTION AXIS Each axis must be programmed before use. Once the motion configuration is completed, use the “Program Axis” button from the Provisioning window to store the configuration to the motors. Each motor will receive a letter name (A-Z) during this process.

Motors MUST be programmed individually, using a primary communication cable with only a single motor connected at a time. It is not possible to program correctly with multiple motors connected with a “daisy chain” cable.

Because a unique name is generated for each motion axis, all of the Motion types should be added to the Motion configuration before the axes programming process is started.

10 -6 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en axisTo programa Motion 6 5 4 3 2 1 • complete the programming of the axis. the of programming the complete to Wizard Wizard instructions Follow the appears. Program Controller Axis The button. Hardware... clicktheProgram name, display and After Hardwaredriver the selecting B A The Motion Configuration Programming page Click the Provisioning tab. pageClick theProvisioning Provisioning The appears. panel settings axis appears. motion The list. configuration the Current from type Motion the select tool, Configuration Motion the From appears. tool Configuration Motion The button. Configure Click the bemodified. to Configuration the Motion Select tab. Hardware Click the page Hardware The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From Md rivemotors. This buttonstarts the hardware pr The current configuration toprogram ogramming wizard used to download configuration data into IMS MOTION CONFIGURATION Intelligent motioncontrol WinLaseUser Guide LAN B A

10 -7 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

CONFIGURING AXIS SETTINGS Each axis has speed, acceleration, limits, homing and encoder settings that need to be configured.

To change the Provisioning settings 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences.

2 Click the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Select the Motion Configuration to be modified. 4 Click the Configure button. The Motion Configuration tool appears.

5 From the Motion Configuration tool, select the Motion type from the Current configuration list. The motion axis settings panel appears.

6 Click the Provisioning tab. The Provisioning page appears.

A B C D E

The Motion Configuration Provisioning page A The number of microsteps per motor revolution is displayed. This value is calculated differently based on the motor's encoder setting. If the encoders are disabled (open loop mode) the microsteps per revolution are the (Microstep Resolution)*200 steps / rotation. This gives 52,100 microsteps per revolution at the highest microstep resolution setting. If the encoders are disabled there is a fixed value of 2048 microsteps/rev based on the encoder resolution.

10 -8 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en D C B F E speeds and accelerations with the run curr withtherun accelerations and speeds to preventis necessary desiredto speeds andaccelerations add the against theneedforastiffmotor balance higher holdcurrent usesmorecaus and electricity maintain itscurrent position, and thusahigher ho aZ- idle(like loads themotorat amount ofcurrentmotorthat usestokeep the th currentmotor hold the parameter sets This asape distance and measuring the actual traveled distance. correctget the calibrationfactor. Ve 142.2 µsteps/degree. A20: example, thisvaluew for mo specific system tothe the changes andcalibrate µsteps/degree, µsteps/mm, µsteps/inch, etc. This microstepsof thenumber parameter selects This pe =1arc 108 µstep / minute • degrees .01 µstep / = 18 • 16,25,32, 50, 64, 100, 128, 200, 250, 256. Otherspecialvaluesare: This valueselects levelofmicrosteppingthe inopen WinLasesetting is This mark field. LAN This parameter reverses the direction the motor tr high stage loads increasehigh stage nece the hold currentAt high movement dutycycle. va amount ofcurrentus motor the This parameter sets themotor ru the motor fromthe motor becoming ill be the same asthenumberofmicr same the be ill 1 high-precision stagewouldrequire th es during movements. Fastermovem es during movements. axisstage attached) withamarkerhead requires more current to n current as a percentage ofto ssary run current.ssary run curr Setthe run without stalling, but do no but run withoutstalling, rify the calibration factor iscorr rify thecalibration determined bythestage configuration. determined ent and duty cycle to find the optimal setting. tofindtheoptimal ent anddutycycle lues the motor canbeco motor lues the e motor static between movements. A stage which stage A movements. motor staticbetween e multiplier is used to acco used to multiplier is unnecessarily hot. It is important to balance the tobalance hot.Itisimportant unnecessarily itional heatintroduced in averses withrespect to es the motor to heat up, so it isimportantto so toheatup, es themotor ld current valuethana rcentage oftotal curren tion stagetion setup. For atypical 1:1 rotary stage, r unit distance at the part. It will be in units of in be part. Itwill atthe r unitdistance loop mode. Acceptable valuesareAcceptable loopmode. 10, 8, 5, 2,4, MOTION CONFIGURATION osteps/revolutionor dividedby360, tal current. current Run isthe Intelligent motioncontrol is value tobemultipliedby20 is value t set the run current settherun t than higher WinLaseUser Guide LAN ents, higher a higher ents, ect by moving the stage agiven ect bymovingthestage ent to a setting toasetting ent that allows the me hottothetouch. the positive axis of the positive axisofthe the mmodate for any gearing forany mmodate stage with lower load. A load. A withlower stage t. Hold currentt. Hold isthe to thesystem and the ccelerations, and

10 -9 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

To change the Encoder settings 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. 2 Click the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Select the Motion Configuration to be modified.

4 Click the Configure button. The Motion Configuration tool appears. 5 From the Motion Configuration tool, select the Motion type from the Current configuration list. The motion axis settings panel appears.

6 Click the Encoder tab. The Encoder page appears.

A B C D E

The Motion Configuration Encoder page A Enables the built-in encoders on equipped drives. Choose drives with the “-EQ” option to get the built-in 2048 line encoder. B This parameter sets the number of counts that determine the width of the “dead band”. In closed loop feedback mode the motor will compare the requested position with the encoder position and automatically make adjustments to ensure that the motor is in the correct place. The dead band is the zone around the requested point at which the motor considers it “close enough”. It is important to balance the desire for a tight tolerance against the physical parameters of the stage and the extra current required to maintain a location against static load. This value is only meaningful when “Enable position maintenance” is checked.

10 -10 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en C E D in position maintenance mode because it causes a fa a causes because it in positionmaintenancemode usefulminimizeto damageof inthecasemotor cras counts of than thenumber marker.current If themotor's pos requiredcounts of sets thenumber The stallfactor option toprotect system from the in damage This optioncausesstalls detected enough toallow the st bandset thedeadand factor stall to reasonable values, and ensure thatthe run current ishigh Select thisoption toenable theclosed-loop desired position. moving ifStop onStall is checked aregreat so thestallfactoran thattheyexceed movements necessarytocorrect er comparerequestedthe position withthecurrent po age to move if position maintenance isrequired.maintenance position tomoveif age set inthisstallfactor . is. When positionmaintenance enab to stop the motor from stopthe motor to un moving ition isdifferentition fromcurr the rors ofthe tolerance the within position maintenance algo the case of stage crashes thecaseofstage orpart jams. error reportedbe will stop will andthemotor the motor will errorthe motor out and forastallerrorbe to sition reportedsition and makeany bytheencoders ult if the maintenance is themaintenance ult if hes,jams, part orother issues.useful Itisalso MOTION CONFIGURATION ent requestedgreaterby position Intelligent motioncontrol WinLaseUser Guide LAN dead band. If the position errors position the If dead band. til the motor isreset.til themotor this Use led itis to led important properly rithm. The rithm. The motor will reported tothelaser unable to maintain the the unabletomaintain stop moving. Thisis moving. stop

10 -1110 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

To change the Homing settings 1 From the Main menu, select System > Preferences. 2 Click the Hardware tab. The Hardware page appears.

3 Select the Motion Configuration to be modified.

6 Click the Homing tab. The Homing page appears.

A B C F G D E H

The Motion Configuration Homing page in slew mode A The Homing style pull down menu selects the homing behavior from a number of different options as described below. In all cases, if the high or low limit is reached before the home limit is reached the slew direction will reverse, but the creep direction will remain the same • Slew in Minus direction, then creep in Minus direction - The stage will slew in the negative direction until the limit switch is found, then creep in the minus direction across the length of the switch until the edge of the switch is found • Slew in Plus direction, then creep in Minus direction • The stage will slew in the positive direction until the limit switch is reached, then creep in the negative direction until the edge of the limit switch is found.

10 -12 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en H G F B C E D • Sinking Sinking - where the limit I/Opin at 24V • andsourcisinking of differing polarity • Run to Minus Limit Switch - The stage will run to stage will The Switch- Run toMinusLimit • stagerun - Thewill Switch Run toPlusLimit • option will change some choicesin “Atho the whereis menu pull down This of thewiringstyle forvalueSelect ahigh accurateand quickhoming. will decelerat is therateatwhichstage This This parameter sets thedeceleratio slewsrequire longerhome while time, homing slow down menu. Setthisvaluetoaslowmedium the appropriate creeps limit,then manner dete ina velocity insteps/ setsthe“slew” This parameter settin typical a 0msis debounce. instability ontrans or“bounce” lot ofelectrical On Encoder Index Mark-This selection causes • Home input is floating causes - Thisselection • Select from thefollowingoptions: • Home input is pulled HIGH (or LOW) - This sel This (or LOW)- is pulledHIGH Home input • direction, inPlus Slew thencreep dir inPlus • negative. When the stage has reac stage the When negative. down menu.Setthisvalueto the appropriate creeps limit,then manner dete ina This parametersets “creep”the velocityin steps/ the homing the routinehoming toth continues requ inmilliseconds a time The sensordebounceis corrected using thisparameter. on twodifferent Each machines. creeppar speed.Thisfunctionis This parameter sets theoffsetpo is the most common setting when settingwhen is themostcommon input astransitioningfromHigh (sourcing)to Low position position until theedgeof switch is found. isfound,thencreep switch until thelimit the in same home location everytimeon anarbitrary system gearing sincethere isonehome systems without limitswitches. It reaches motor encoder the when abu floating state as activation. This option is av optionis This activation. as floating state a low setting for accurate homing. accurate a lowsettingfor ticularly useful when trying to useful whentrying ticularly sition from flag instep home the machine willhaveadifferent necessa g for solid state opticalsensors. state g forsolid hed home it will move thedesiredit willmove home hed e next phase. This is intended This phase. next e n rate of the stagen rateofthe during thehoming processunitsin ofsteps/s2. index every motorrevolution, every index is important not to use this se to usethis important not is using solid state optical limits. solid stateoptical using ng modes. Select the following options: following the Select ng modes. ilt-in index mark. This is very useful for direct useful mark.Thisisvery ilt-in index rotary drive ispulleddownto0Vactivate, me when” pulldownme me setting for accurate settingfor homing.Slower homeslews ection - The stage will slew in the positive directionslew thepositive in ection -Thestagewill e when it finishes itssl e whenitfinishes ailable inboth sinkingsourcing and modes. ition. Most mechanical switch systems require mechanical switchsystems Mostition. a seconds. The homing stage first slews homingstagefirst untilitfinds The seconds. the limit sensorsthe limit isconfigured. Changingthis seconds. The first stage seconds. The homing slews until it finds to the positive limit switch, thensetthehome switch, limit to thepositive the system tointerpret a the system entering pin theI/O rmined by the setting of the “Homing Style” bythesettingof“Homing rmined pull rmined by the setting of the “Homing Style” bythesettingof“Homing rmined pull positive directionpositive across th ired fromuntil is activated switch whenalimit increasedcreep distances ection causes thesystem ection the system to determine ithasreacheddetermine to itshome the system MOTION CONFIGURATION the negative limit switch,thensetthehome limit thenegative or High to Low (sinking) as activation. This activation. toLow(sinking)asor High execute the same executethesame WinLase LAN job to compensate for switcheswitha to compensate s. Thisvaluecan be positive or Intelligent motioncontrol WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase which maynotcorrespond to the tting on systems with alternative with alternative tting onsystems number of steps at the home number ofstepsatthehome ry home offset, ry homeoffset, which canbe nu to accommodate the nu toaccommodatethe ew andcreep movements. tointerpret thelimit due to stage inertia. duetostage e lengthoftheswitch

10 -13 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

• Sourcing - where the limit I/O pin at 0V is pulled up to 24V to activate.

The Motion Configuration Homing page in Run to limit mode A This parameter sets the acceleration rate of the stage during the homing process in units of steps/s2. This is the rate at which the stage will start it’s move to the limit switch. Select a high value for accurate and quick homing.

10 -14 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To change the Limits settings 6 5 4 3 2 1 E D C B A A The Motion Configuration Limitspage Click the LimitsClick the tab. Limits The pageappears. panel settings axis appears. motion The list. configuration the Current from type Motion the select tool, Configuration Motion the From appears. tool Configuration Motion The button. Configure Click the bemodified. to Configuration the Motion Select tab. Hardware Click the page Hardware The appears. >Preferences. System select menu, Main the From B IgnoreIgnoresused - limits Commonly switches. limit • • Home input is pulled HIGH (or LOW) - This sel This (or LOW)- is pulledHIGH Home input • Limit is floating causes - Thisselection the sy • Select from thefollowingoptions: hardware totheminus sw limit Soft limit Soft limit of hardware travelinth is the most common setting when settingwhen is themostcommon input astransitioningfromHigh (sourcing)to Low switches. optionisavaila This activation. as state itch and noting the value ofthe itch andnotingthevalue e negative direction. e negative This valueca using solid state optical limits. solid stateoptical using ble in both sinkingsourcing and modes. stem tointerpretstem afloating entering pin I/O the ection causes the system ection MOTION CONFIGURATION or High to Low (sinking) as activation. This activation. toLow(sinking)asor High fordirect driverotary withnolimit stages position counter.value a Enter Intelligent motioncontrol WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase n be n be set precisely by moving the tointerpret thelimit F

10 -15 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Intelligent motion control

greater than the position counter for WinLase LAN to limit the travel. For the limit switch to limit the travel, enter a value less than the position counter. C Soft limit of hardware travel in the positive direction. This value can be set precisely by moving the hardware to the plus limit switch and noting the value of the position counter. Enter a value less than the position counter for WinLase LAN to limit the travel. For the limit switch to limit the travel, enter a value greater than the position counter. D The sensor debounce is a time in milliseconds required from when a limit switch is activated until the limit is considered activated. This is intended to compensate for switches with a lot of electrical “bounce” or instability on transition. Most mechanical switch systems require a debounce. 0ms is a typical setting for solid state optical sensors. E Use this option to decelerate the motor using a ramp profile instead of a constant profile. This setting is used for stages with high inertia that do not respond well to rapid deceleration. F This pull down menu is where the wiring style of the limit sensors is configured. Changing this option will change some choices in the “At home when” pull down menu to accommodate the differing polarity of sinking and sourcing modes. Select the following options: • Sinking - where the limit I/O pin at 24V is pulled down to 0V to activate, • Sourcing - where the limit I/O pin at 0V is pulled up to 24V to activate.

10 -16 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en To install with Plug and Play the MotorTo installController Card 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 7 WARNING controller card. If WinLase is sure that WinLase LAN is already installed on the target machine before installing the motor Beforeusing the motorcontroller card, itmust NOTE CARD MOTORCONTROLLER THE INSTALLING rotaryi for applicationssuchas controller capability. With thiscontroller, Wi Using the OMSPCIx series motioncontroller, ...... MOTIONCONTROLLER OMS PRO-DEX Replace the computer cover. computer the Replace installed below. slotisshown inaPCI screw. cover card slot the replace controller then motor and The place into card clicks the until PCIexpansion firmly the Pressdown slot. card into controller motor the Insert by its edges. its from card controller antistatic motor the card Remove the packaging. Alwayshandle Step usein for 5. expansion the Remove cover. slot. slot PCI an unused Locate screw cover slot Savethe cover). the removing on forinstructions computer. the from manual cover the computer Remove the to (Refer computer). metal exposed metal the parts (like agrounded object touching the of back the on Cardby Controller Motor the handling before static any build-up Discharge electricity OMS drivers. installation the the of Windows completes dialog. Needed Files the close Click OKto browse dialog. folder. \marker\oms the to browse and closethe OKto button, Click Browse Click the 2000). (Windows dialog Needed the Files show computer. the Power up and After newhardware the Windows willdetect in, logging computer.to the cables power the Reconnect Turn OFFthe power to the computer anddisconnect the power cord. • Not supportedonWindows Vista orWindows 7. • not installed, see GettingStnot installed, ndexers, XYtables, nLase can interface to 4 individualmotor axes, WinLasemotor full 4-axis a LANprovides beproperly installe MOTION CONFIGURATION linear slides, etc. Pro-Dex OMS motion controller arted >SoftwareInstallation. WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase d andconfigured. Make

10 -17 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Pro-Dex OMS motion controller

CONFIGURING THE MOTOR CONTROLLER SETTINGS

To configure the Motor Controller Settings 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences. 2 Click on the Motor Control tab. The Motor Control page appears.

3 Click the Configure button. The OMS Motor Controller setup appears.

10 -18 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en 4 H G F E D C B A I E D C B A The Controllerpage Settings Click the Controller Settings tab. Settings Click theController page Settings Controller The appears. K J I H G F L M Changes thedirection Enter velocitytheuserwill the be minimum allo application. us velocity the Set themaximum to accelerate throughresonance fastas aspossible. forthe currentSet thebasevelocity Note th axis. currentSelect the axistoedit. Set the maximum acceleration acceleration Set themaximum Select ramp forthecurrentthe acceleration axis. Relative • Absolute • Select from thefollowingoptions: using adecelerationprofile. featureThis Th enabled. isalways moves. executing while switches featureThis Themotorcont is alwaysenabled. Define contact switch the stat Select the number ofstep Select the Define the switchDefine thecontact statewhenatthe home position. the motor turns when given a move command. when givenamove motor turns the s in the acceleration ramp. s intheacceleration e when at the limit position. e whenatthelimit rate forthecurrent axis. er will be allowed toenterthroughout allowed be er will theWinLaseLAN e motorcontrollere willstopanaxis rollermonitor theforward will andreverse limit wed to enter throughoutwed toenter theWinLase application. at setting a nonzero base velocity provides a means MOTION CONFIGURATION Pro-Dex OMS motion controller WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase after a limit switch issignaled switch a limit after K J N M L

10 -19 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Pro-Dex OMS motion controller

N When homing, approach the home switch moving in the direction selected in this control.

LEARNING THE HOME AND LIMIT POSITIONS Before using your motor controller card, the Home, Forward and Reverse limits must be learned so WinLase LAN knows what the mechanical limits for each axis are. The setup of the Home and Limits are in the XY Table, Custom Axis or Rotary pages.

NOTE • The Controller Settings should be set up before setting the Home And Limits. In the Controller Settings page, the Direction selection should be based on how this axis is generally moved. If you usually leave the motor on the positive side of home then you should use the negative edge (direction) for detection

Homing the axis Homing is performed at 90 percent of the maximum speed for the axis. This value is set in the Controller Settings page for each axis. Start at the highest practical axis speed and adjust down until homing and carriage movement is acceptable. To offset the Home position (for example so that Home equals 1000 steps), enter 1000 in the edit box next to the Home button. Click the Apply button then click the Home Button for this offset to take effect. Changing the Sensor Direction or Home Position Offset probably requires changes to axis position values in currently saved jobs. Therefore it is suggested that home be established and kept with the same parameters once installed. It is also suggested that upon starting WinLase LAN the motor position(s) should be between the limit sensors for best results.

A Motor Home Menu is called upon entering WinLase LAN. This window (see below) is used to force all axes to home when WinLase LAN is first started.

The Home axes dialog

10 -20 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Finding the forward and reverse limits maximum speed then findthe limit window. The limit valuechanges movement.limit The movement offthe motor will move the limit switch,in appropriate buttons), the current position will that whenautomatic Forward orReverse Limit move toa to Home orMoveRelative click set alimitwhenontheswitch.Ifanaxisis be is found the homeposition is suggestedthat It havingtheir machineservicedbecaus consider functions intheir jobs. If they believe the corre need tohomecontinuallythenmay cons they the opera been homedthen not also allowshoming ofth Manager It isalso available from anaxis automation object's Properties menu. In addition, the Motor are setthenonlyuponchangingthe Home posit normal operation. In all cases the OKbutton must be used to save settings. Once the limits and most designs allow amargin the maximumor what thepersonty tor will enter the Motor Home Menu. If one finds that they one findsthat Home Menu.If Motor will enterthe tor speed is based on the value in the Motor Properties Motor the valuein based on is speed between the limit switch and maximum travel for needed travel andmaximum switch limit the between slightly duetospeed.Onema e selected axis. If a job is selected to runand anaxishas to selected e selectedaxis. Ifajobis pically uses in their jobs. This is a very minor difference a second time at asl second time a caseyouwanttope position where the motor is offposition wherethe motor sensor. the Note iderto how betteraxis usethe automation not equal the limit value because WinLaselimit valuebecause notequalthe e this is not normal f this isnotnormal e sensing isaccomplished (by clicking the ct position is being lost then they need to in this condition,then ion should the limitsneed tobereset. fore setting the limits. MOTION CONFIGURATION Pro-Dex OMS motion controller ightly slower speed such as half of such ightly slowerspeed WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase y want to find the limit and want tofindthe y rform another limit rform another unctioning of the device. unctioning ofthe clickStop andeither It is not possible to

10 -21 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Pro-Dex OMS motion controller

CONFIGURING THE AXIS TYPES

To edit the XY Table Settings 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Motor Control tab. The Motor Control page appears.

3 Click the Properties button. The OMS Motor Controller setup appears. 4 Click the XY Table tab. The XY Table page appears.

B H C D I E J G K F

The XY Table page: A Enables/disables the axis. When an axis is disabled, it is not accessible from the WinLase LAN user interface. B The name WinLase LAN displays within dialogs and controls to represent the axis. C Click this button to home the axis. In the edit box to the right of the Home button, enter the step count to assign to the home position. When an axis is homed, it will have this position value at home. The units are in motor steps. D Use this button to find the forward limit stop switch. After the axis has found the forward limit stop, the position count is saved and displayed in the edit box to the right of the Fwd button. The forward limit is used to warn the user of the physical limits of the axis. E The calibration factor for the axis, in steps/millimeter (mm).

10 -22 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Axisthe Custom Settings To edit 4 3 2 1 E D C B A F The CustomAxis page dependingthe application. on configuring provided toallow is The CustomAxis F Click the Custom Axis tab. page Axis Axis Custom Custom Click the The appears. appears. setup Controller OMS Motor The button. Properties Click the tab. page Control Control Motor Motor the appears. The Click on bar, menu the From > Preferences. selectSystem J K I H G the positionsaved count and is disp Use thisbuttontofindthereverselimit stopswitch. The speed at which the motor w the which The speedat theam move motor will the is Relative, Absolute, the motor will move to th move to will themotor Absolute, limit is used to of warn the user Executes a motor move based on the value inMoveto. value the basedon motor move a Executes The position to move the motor to The positiontomovethe The currentposition ofamotormove. stopsexecution Immediately count ofthemotor. the physical limits oftheaxis. physicallimits the ill executethemove,insteps/Sec. G whentheGobuttonisclicked e absolute position indi absolute e layed in the edit box to the intheedit righ box tothe layed ount in Move fromount inMove H After the axis has found the reverse found the theaxishas After stop, limit MOTION CONFIGURATION a motorbeaxis toeither linearor rotary, Pro-Dex OMS motion controller cated in Move To.Move in cated areMoves Ifthe setting its currentposition. . If theMovesare. If is setting WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase t of the Rev button. Thereversebutton. Rev t ofthe I L K J

10 -23 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Pro-Dex OMS motion controller

A Enables/disables the axis. When an axis is disabled, it is not accessible from the WinLase LAN user interface. B The name WinLase LAN displays within dialogs and controls to represent the axis. C Click this button to home the axis. In the edit box to the right of the Home button, enter the step count to assign to the home position. When an axis is homed, it will have this position value at home. The units are in motor steps. D Use this button to find the forward limit stop switch. After the axis has found the forward limit stop, the position count is saved and displayed in the edit box to the right of the Fwd button. The forward limit is used to warn the user of the physical limits of the axis. E Select the type of motion device: • Rotary - Select this radio button to represent the axis within WinLase LAN as a rotary device. • Linear - Select this radio button to represent the axis within WinLase LAN as a linear device. F The calibration factor for the axis, in steps/millimeter (mm). G Use this button to find the reverse limit stop switch. After the axis has found the reverse limit stop, the position count is saved and displayed in the edit box to the right of the Rev button. The reverse limit is used to warn the user of the physical limits of the axis. H Immediately stops execution of a motor move. I Current motor position counter J The position to move the motor to when the Go button is clicked. If the Moves are setting is Absolute, the motor will move to the absolute position indicated in Move To. If the Moves are setting is Relative, the motor will move the amount in Move from its current position. K The speed at which the motor will execute the move, in steps/Sec. L Executes a motor move based on the value in Move to.

10 -24 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en the RotaryAxisTo edit Settings 4 3 2 1 E D C B A C B A The Rotary page Click the RotaryClick the tab. Rotary The page appears. appears. setup Controller OMSMotor The button. Properties Click the tab. page Control Control Motor Motor the appears. The Click on bar, menu the From > Preferences. selectSystem D F E G Click this button tohometheaxis. Click WinLaseThe name displayswithindial LAN interface. Enables/disables the axis. When an axis is disabl count toassignthehomeposi limit is used to of warn the user issavedanddisp the positioncount Use thisbutton to find the forward limit stop switc Theunitsarehome. steps. inmotor the positionsaved count and is disp Use thisbuttontofindthereverselimit stopswitch. The calibration factor for factor The calibration limit is used to of warn the user Immediately stops execution ofamotormove. stopsexecution Immediately the axis, insteps/degree. the physical limits oftheaxis. physicallimits the the physical limits oftheaxis. physicallimits the F tion. When an axis is homed, it ishomed, When an axis tion. In the edit box totherightof In theedit layed in the edit box to therigh layed intheeditboxto layed in the edit box to the intheedit righ box tothe layed ogsand controls torepresent theaxis. G ed, itis not accessible from the WinLase LAN user h. theaxis After has fo After the axis has found the reverse found the theaxishas After stop, limit MOTION CONFIGURATION Pro-Dex OMS motion controller will havethisposition value at the Home button, button, the Home WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase t of the Fwd button.The forwardof theFwd t t of the Rev button. Thereversebutton. Rev t ofthe und the forward limitstop, H K J I enter thestep

10 -25 . . . . . MOTION CONFIGURATION 10 Pro-Dex OMS motion controller

H The current position count of the motor. I The position to move the motor to when the Go button is clicked. If the Moves are setting is Absolute, the motor will move to the absolute position indicated in Move To. If the Moves are setting is Relative, the motor will move the amount in Move from its current position. J The speed at which the motor will execute the move, in steps/s.

To view the OMS Card Properties 1 From the menu bar, select System > Preferences.

2 Click on the Motor Control tab. The Motor Control page appears.

3 Click the Properties button. The OMS Motor Controller setup appears. 4 Click the Card Properties tab. The Card Properties page appears.

10 -26 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en WARRANTY ...... 11 .

Lanmark Controls Inc. warrants to the Customer that the product is free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of 12 months from the delivery date.

Lanmark Controls Inc.' obligation under this warranty is limited to repair, replacement or service, at its option, of any part of the product, which within the warranty period and upon Lanmark Controls Inc.' examination shall disclose to its satisfaction not to have conformed to this Agreement or to have been defective. Defective parts or products are to be returned to Lanmark Controls Inc. place of shipment.

The above warranties do not apply (i) to defects or failure of product or parts caused by accident, alteration, abuse, misuse, corrosion or improper installation or operation, or (ii) to alterations or modifications made by Customer in any way so as in Lanmark Controls Inc.' judgment to affect the products reliability, or (iii) to installation not performed pursuant to Lanmark Controls Inc.' factory authorized protocol, or (iv) in the case of custom software designed to interact with other Customer-supplied software, in the event of any change, upgrade or reprogramming of such Customer-supplied software so as to create an incompatibility with Lanmark Controls Inc. software.

Authorization to return products purchased from Lanmark Controls Inc. must be obtained by Customer. Returns should always be carefully packed and sent freight prepaid. Unless otherwise agreed, return shipment freight and duty charges shall be borne by Customer. Customer shall bear all charges for freight and handling of products returned which are not defective.

THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide 11 -1 WARRANTY 11

11 -2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en Index ......

A Connectivity Options 4-1 Distortion 8-2 Align Tool 5-53 Controlled by Remote API 6-74 Alignment Tool 6-86 Controlling WinLase LAN G Automation Objects 6-85 Remotely 7-28 Getting Started with WinLase Copyright Information 1-2 LAN 2-1 B Correction Files 8-3 Grid and Guidelines 5-54 Add an existing file 8-4 Barcodes Guideline Adjust the Scan Field CodaBar settings 6-41 Presets 5-58 Rotation 8-10 Code 128 settings 6-47 Adjust the X and Y Field Code 39 settings 6-39 H Offset 8-9 Code 93 settings 6-43 Host Interface 7-28 Adjust the X and Y Field Data Matrix settings 6-53 Scaling 8-8 EAN settings 6-51 I Calibrating 8-8 Filling with Dots or Circles 6-77 I/O Job Selection 4-30 Create a new file 8-4 Interleaved 2 of 5 settings 6-49 Mapping Table 4-30 Grid Correction 8-7 PDF417 settings 6-57 Timing 4-32 Custom Axis 6-90 POSTNET settings 6-44 Importing DXF and DWG files 6-84 QR Code settings 6-55 Importing Graphics at actual size 6- UPC settings 6-45 D 83 Beam Home settings 7-20 Dimension Tool 5-46 Insert Time Delay 6-92 Bitmap Graphic 6-25 Installation E Software 2-1 C External Control 6-5 Intelligent motion control 10-1 Configuring a Direct Connection 4-5 Interactive tool 4-42 Connecting the Motion Hardware 10- F Introduction 1-1 2 Fieldbus Interface Concepts 7-28 COM Automation Server Connectivity Fill (Hatching) 6-7 Library 1-3 Checking the Connection Understanding Closed Paths 6-9 Host Programming Interface 1- Status 4-12 Fonts 3 Closing an active connection 4- Adding a new Laser font to an System Architecture 1-2 10 LEC-1 device 5-40 System Elements 1-2 Connecting automatically 4-10 Adding a new Laser font to TCP/IP Test Client 1-4 Connecting manually 4-7 WinLase LAN 5-40 WinLase LAN Graphical User Connecting through a Local Adding a new TrueType font 5- Interface 1-2 Area Network 4-5 38 IP Addressing Schemes 4-4 Creating a new Laser Font 5-38 J Making a Connection 4-6 Dot Matrix Laser Fonts 6-75 Job Selecting the default Network Managing 5-38 External Start 7-15 Adapter 4-5 F-theta Objective Induced

v 1.5 en WinLase LAN User Guide I-1 INDEX

Job Editing 5-1 LEC-1 P Job Entities 6-1 Assigning Jobs 5-11 Passwords Adding Notes 6-4 Changing strings at run-time 5- Changing and Deleting 3-24 Changing the Name 6-2 14 Point Array 6-27 Job Events Choosing Laser, Lens and Polygon Object 6-28 Before a Job is Executed 7-7 Motion Settings 4-13 PreviewMark 7-1 Job Execution 7-9 Configuring External Start Printing Jobs 5-62 Job Loading 7-6 Settings 5-15 Profiles 6-9 Jobs Control Signal Options 4-35 Adding 5-31 Adding a System Entity 5-16 Controlling Remotely 4-28 Applying to Objects 5-33 Creating, Opening and Device Name 4-2 Creating and Organizing 5-30 Closing 5-4 Diagnostic Tools 4-39 Importing and Exporting 5-36 Cut, Copy, and Paste Job Firmware Updates 4-43 Managing 5-28 Entities 5-18 I/O Job Selection 4-30 Modifying Existing 5-35 Default Open and Save I/O Job Selection timing 4-32 Moving 5-32 Behavior 5-10 Managing Files 4-28 The Default Profile 5-28 Default settings 7-23 Stand-Alone Job Profiles Panel 3-15 Deleting Objects 5-20 Considerations 5-14 Editing Objects in the Understanding how WinLase Q Workspace 5-22 LAN uses laser, lens Quick Start Guide 10-2 Exporting Entities 5-20 and motion Software 3-1 Importing another Job 5-18 Settings 4-13 QuickMark Importing Graphic files 5-17 Linear Motion 6-95 Mark Time 7-5 Locking/Unlocking Objects 5- QuickMark Feature 7-4 26 M Moving to a new location 5-9 Managing Fonts 5-38 R Pasting a Graphic file 5-17 Manufacturer 1-5 Rectangle Object 6-29 Saving 5-5 Mark on the Fly 4-33, 7-17 Rotary Indexer 6-97 Saving Stand-Alone (LEC Mark Time 6-13 Rotary Motion 6-99 binary) Job files 5-5 Marking Jobs 7-1 Rounded Rectangle Object 6-30 Selecting and Deselecting MergeFile RS-232 and TCP/IP Interface Objects 5-21 View 7-20 Concepts 7-28 Undoing Actions 5-27 Micro-vectoring and Delays 6-13 Run Application 6-101 Using Select All 5-20 Mirror Induced Distortion 8-2 Run jobs remotely 7-24 Jobs Tab 3-13 Motion Running Jobs 7-6 Intelligent Motion 5-42 From the Workspace 7-22 L Prodex OMS Controller 5-45 Running Stand-Alone Jobs 7-24 Language 3-2 Runtime Errors 5-44 Laser Control 6-93 Motion Configuration 10-1 Laser font Motion Manager 3-16, 5-42 S Adding to an LEC-1 device 5- Safety Considerations 2-4 40 O Security Controlling Access Level at Adding to WinLase LAN 5-40 Object Manager 3-14 Creating 5-38 Startup 3-26 Laser System Viewer 3-13 User Access 3-25 LaserSaver settings 7-21 Security Settings 3-21

I-2 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en v 1.5 en Strings Step and Repeat LEC-1 Status Icons, Software Tools Snap toGuidelines Snap toGrid Show Messagebox I/OPort Set Serializing Text 6-103 Serial Communication Script File Format File Script Get Stringfrom MemoryBuffer Custom Stringfeature Changing theString atRuntime Automaticallythe reset serial AutoDate option >Shift Code AutoDate Client Test TCP/IP Admin Tool LEC Remote

6-108 5-54 option 59 (Dynamic Strings) number option

6-67 7-14

6-109

5-55

4-11

6-70 6-65 6-63

6-69

6-105 1-4

6-71

1-4

6- Vector GraphicObjects V Understanding Fi U TrueType font The Marking Field and Lens Template Object Template Technical Support T Subnet mismatch Editing orRemoving Creating Text Merge option String EveryMark Supply Supply String at Start option Serialize options Adding toWindows

6-115 option 66

eld Distortions 6-115

4-7 1-4

6-66 6-67

6-82 6-61

5-38 6-115

8-1

6- Workspace WorkingLEC-1 withthe Configurations Working withMotion Warranty Wait forExternal Signal W Zoom Tools Z XY Table Motion XY X Operator Interface Left Toolbar Job Editor Customizing the Page Size Coordinate System Touchscreen Interface Top Toolbar Rulers

WinLase LAN User Guide User LAN WinLase 11-1 6-111

5-1 3-11 6-113 5-60

Conventions

10-3 3-4

3-8 3-9

3-17

6-110 4-1

3-18 5-1 INDEX

5-2

I-3 . . . . . INDEX

I-4 WinLase LAN User Guide v 1.5 en